Model SR7001/SR8001 User Guide AV Surround Receiver

Model SR7001/SR8001 User Guide

AV Surround Receiver ENGLISH NEDERLANDS ITALIANO

WARRANTY GARANTIE GARANZIA For warranty information, contact your local Marantz Voor inlichtingen omtrent garantie dient u zich tot uw L’apparecchio è coperto da una garanzia di buon distributor. plaatselijke Marantz. funzionamento della durata di un anno, o del periodo RETAIN YOUR PURCHASE RECEIPT UW KWITANTIE, KASSABON E.D. BEWAREN previsto dalla legge, a partire dalla data di acquisto Your purchase receipt is your permanent record of a Uw kwitantie, kassabon e.d. vormen uw bewijs van comprovata da un documento attestante il nominativo valuable purchase. It should be kept in a safe place aankoop van een waardevol artikel en dienen op een del Rivenditore e la data di vendita. La garanzia sarà to be referred to as necessary for insurance purposes veilige plaats bewaard te worden voor evt, verwijzing prestata con la sostituzione o la riparazione gratuita or when corresponding with Marantz. bijv, in verbend met verzekering of bij correspondentie delle parti difettose. met Marantz. Non sono coperti da garanzia difetti derivanti da IMPORTANT uso improprio, errata installazione, manutenzione When seeking warranty service, it is the responsibility of BELANGRIJK effettuata da personale non autorizzato o, comunque, the consumer to establish proof and date of purchase. Bij een evt, beroep op de garantie is het de da circostanze che non possano riferirsi a difetti di Your purchase receipt or invoice is adequate for such verantwoordelijkheid van de consument een funzionamento dell’apparecchio. Sono inoltre esclusi proof. gedateerd bewijs van aankoop te tonen. Uw dalla garanzia gli interventi inerenti l’installazione e FOR U.K. ONLY kassabon of factuurzijn voldoende bewijs. l’allacciamento agli impianti di alimentazione. This undertaking is in addition to a consumer's Gli apparecchi verranno riparati presso i nostri Centri statutory rights and does not affect those rights in ESPAÑOL di Assistenza Autorizzati. Le spese ed i rischi di any way. trasporto sono a carico del cliente. GARANTIA La casa costruttrice declina ogni responsabilità per FRANÇAIS Para obtener información acerca de la garantia danni diretti o indiretti provocati dalla inosservanza póngase en contacto con su distribuidor Marantz. delle prescrizioni di installazione, uso e manutenzione dettagliate nel presente manuale o per guasti dovuti ad GARANTIE GUARDE SU RECIBO DE COMPRA uso continuato a fi ni professionali. Pour des informations sur la garantie, contacter le Su recibo de compra es su prueba permanente de distributeur local Marantz. haber adquirido un aparato de valor, Este recibo CONSERVER L'ATTESTATION D'ACHAT deberá guardarlo en un lugar seguro y utilizarlo SVENSKA L'attestation d'achat est la preuve permanente como referencia cuando tenga que hacer uso del d'un achat de valeur. La conserver en lieu sur pour seguro o se ponga en contacto con Marantz. GARANTI s'y reporter aux fi ns d'obtention d'une couverture IMPORTANTE För information om garantin, kontakta Marantz d'assurance ou dans le cadre de correspondances Cuando solicite el servicio otorgado por la garantia lokalagent. avec Marantz. el usuario tiene la responsabilidad de demonstrar SPAR KVITTOT IMPORTANT cuándo efectuó la compra. En este caso, su recibo Kvittot är ett inköpsbevis på en värdefull vara. Det skall Pour l'obtention d'un service couvert par la garantie, de compra será la prueba apropiada. förvaras säkert och hänvisas till vid försäkringsfall il incombe au client d'établir la preuve de l'achat eller vidkorrespondens mod Marantz. et d'en corroborer la date. Le reçu ou la facture VIKTIGT constituent des preuves suffi santes. Fö att garantin skall gälla är det kundens sak att framställa bevis och datum om köpet. Kvitto eller DEUTSCH faktura är tillräokligt bevis fö detta.

GARANTIE Bei Garantiefragen wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihren Marantz-Händler. HEBEN SIE IHRE QUITTING GUT AUF Die Quittung dient Ihnen als bleibende Unterlage für Ihren wertvollen Einkauf Das Aufbewahren der Quittung ist wichtig, da die darin enthaltenen Angaben für Versicherungswecke oder bei Korrespondenz mit Marantz angeführt werden müssen. WICHTIG! Bei Garantiefragen mu§ der Kunde eine Kaufunterlage mit Kaufdatum vorlegen. Ihren Quittung oder Rechnung ist als Unterlage ausreichend. English - Aucun objet rempli de liquide, un vase par exemple, CE MARKING WARNINGS ne doit être placé sur l'appareil. - Lorsque l'interrupteur est sur la position OFF, English - Do not expose the equipment to rain or moisture. - Do not remove the cover from the equipment. l'appareil n'est pas complètement déconnecté du The SR7001/SR8001 is in conformity with the EMC directive and low-voltage direc- SECTEUR (MAINS). tive. - Do not insert anything into the equipment through the ventilation holes. - L'appareil sera installé près de la source d'alimentation, de sorte que cette dernière soit Français - Do not handle the mains cord with wet hands. facilement accessible. Le SR7001/SR8001 est conforme à la directive EMC et à la directive sur les basses - Do not cover the ventilation with any items such as - Ne pas toucher aux zones chaudes pendant et tensions. tablecloths, newspapers, curtains, etc. immédiatement après l’utilisation. Deutsch - No naked fl ame sources, such as lighted candles, - Pendant l’utilisation et immediatement apres, cet should be placed on the equipment. Das Modell SR7001/SR8001 entspricht den EMC-Richtlinien und den Richtlinien für appareil est chaud en dehors des commandes Niederspannungsgeräte. - When disposing of used batteries, please comply et des prises de raccordement arriere. Ne pas with governmental regulations or environmental Nederlands toucher aux zones chaudes, et particulièrement public instruction’s rules that apply in your country De SR7001/SR8001 voldoet aan de EMC eisen en de vereisten voor laag-voltage. au panneau supérieur, pour éviter tout risque de or area. brûlure. Español - Make a space of about 0.2 meter around the unit. El SR7001/SR8001 está de acuerdo con las normas EMC y las relacionadas con baja - No objects fi lled with liquids, such as vases, shall Deutsch tensión. be placed on the equipment. WARNHINWEISE Italiano - When the switch is in the OFF position, the equipment is not completely switched off from - Das Gerät nicht Regen oder Feuchtigkeit Il SR7001/SR8001 è conforme alle direttive CEE ed a quelle per i bassi voltaggi. MAINS. aussetzen. Svenska - The equipment shall be installed near the - Die Abdeckung nicht vom Gerät abnehmen. SR7001/SR8001 är tillverkad i enlighet med EMC direktiven och direktiven för lågvolt- power supply so that the power supply is easily - Keine Gegenstände durch die Belüftungsschlitze sutrusning. accessible. stecken. - Do Not Touch Hot Spots During and Immediately - Das Netzkabel nicht mit feuchten oder nassen After Use. Händen anfassen. - Decken Sie die Lüftungsöffnungen nicht mit einem - During and immediately after use, this product is Tischtuch, einer Zeitung, einem Vorhang usw. ab. hot in areas other than the controls and rear panel connection jacks. Do not touch hot spots and - Es dürfen keine Gegenstände mit offener Flamme, especially the top panel. Contact with hot areas wie etwa brennende Kerzen, auf dem Gerät can cause burns. aufgestellt werden. - Beachten Sie bei der Entsorgung der verbrauchten Batterien alle geltenden lokalen und überregionalen Français Regelungen. AVERTISSEMENTS - Auf allen Geräteseiten muß ein Zwischenraum - Ne pas exposer l’appareil à la pluie ni à l’humidité. von ungefähr 0,2 meter vorhanden sein. - Ne pas essayer de retirer le boîtier de l’appareil. - Auf das Gerät dürfen keine mit Flüssigkeiten - Ne rien insérer dans l’appareil par les orifi ces de gefüllte Behälter, wie etwa eine Vase, gestellt ventilation. werden. - Ne pas manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec - Wenn der Schalter ausgeschaltet ist (OFF- les mains mouillées. Position), ist das Gerät nicht vollständig vom - Ne pas recouvrir les ouïes de ventilation avec un Stromnetz (MAINS) abgetrennt. objet quelconque comme une nappe, un journal, - Das Gerät sollte in der Nähe einer Netzsteckdose un rideau, etc. aufgestellt werden, damit es leicht an das - Ne placer aucune source de fl amme nue, comme Stromnetz angeschlossen werden kann. une bougie allumée, sur l'appareil. - Berühren Sie während oder unmittelbar nach dem - Pour mettre au rebut les piles usées, respecter les Gebrauch keine heißen Stellen des Gerätes. lois gouvernementales ou les règlements offi ciels - Während oder unmittelbar nach dem Gebrauch ist concernant l’environnement qui s'appliquent à dieses Produkt mit Ausnahme der Bedienelemente votre pays ou région. und der Anschlussbuchsen auf der Rückseite heiß. - Veiller à ce qu’aucun objet ne soit à moins de 0,2 Berühren Sie die heißen Stellen und insbesondere mètre des côtés de l'appareil. die Oberseite nicht. Der Kontakt mit hei§en Flächen kann zu Verbrennungen führen. Nederlands - No se deben colocar sobre el aparato recipientes Svenska WAARSCHUWINGEN que contengan líquidos, como por ejemplo VARNINGAR - Stel het apparaat niet bloot aan regen of vocht. jarrones. - Utsätt inte utrustningen för regn eller fukt. - Verwijder de afdekplaat van het apparaat niet. - Cuando el interruptor está en la posición OFF, el - Ta inte bort utrustningens hölje. equipo no está completamente desconectado de - Duw niets door de ventilatieopeningen in het - För inte in föremål i utrustningen genom la alimentación MAINS. apparaat. ventilationshålen. - El equipo se instalará cerca de la fuente de - Raak het netsnoer niet met natte handen aan. - Hantera inte nätsladden med våta händer. alimentación de manera que resulte fácil acceder - Bedek de ventilatieopeningen niet met enige a ella. - Täck inte för ventilationsöppningarna med voorwerpen, zoals tafelkleden, kranten, gordijnen, några föremål som till exempel bordsdukar, enz. - No tocar las áreas calientes mientras la unidad dagstidningar, gardiner e.d. está en uso ni inmediatamente después. - Plaats geen brandende voorwerpen, zoals - Inga föremål med öppen låga, som till exempel kaarsen, op het apparaat. - Mientras esta en funcionamiento e inmediatamente tända stearinljus, bör placeras på utrustningen. - Volg bij het weggooien van verbruikte batterijen de despues de su uso, este producto presenta zonas - Följ de lagar och miljöskyddsråd som gäller i det overheidswetgeving of milieuvoorschriften op die calientes en diversas partes, no exclusivamente land eller område där du bor när du gör dig av med van kracht zijn in het land of de regio waarin u zich en el sector de los controles o en las conexiones batterier. del panel posterior. No tocar las áreas calientes, bevindt. - Se till att det fi nns omkring 0,2 meter fri plats runt especialmente el panel superior dado que pueden - Zorg dat er 0,2 meter vrije ruimte rond het toestel omkring enheten. producirse quemaduras. is. - Inga objekt som är fyllda med någon vätska, - Plaats geen voorwerpen met een vloeistof erin, till exempel blomstervaser, bör placeras på zoals een bloemenvaas, op het apparaat. Italiano apparaten. - Als de schakelaar op OFF staat, is het apparaat AVVERTENZE - Även om strömbrytaren står i det avstängda läget niet volledig losgekoppeld van de netspanning - Non esporre l’apparecchio alla pioggia o OFF, så är utrustningen inte helt bortkopplad från (MAINS). all’umidità. det elektriska nätet (MAINS). - De apparatuur wordt in de buurt van het stopcontact - Non rimuovere il coperchio dell’apparecchio. - Utrustningen ska vara installerad nära strömuttaget geïnstalleerd, zodat dit altijd gemakkelijk - Non introdurre oggetti all’interno dell’apparecchio så att strömförsörjningen är lätt att tillgå. toegankelijk is. attraverso i fori di ventilazione. - Vidrör inte varma punkter under och omedelbart - Raak hete gedeelten van het apparaat niet aan - Non toccare il cavo di alimentazione con le mani efter användning. tijdens en onmiddellijk na het gebruik. bagnate. - Bortsett från kontrollerna och anslutningsuttagen - Tijdens en onmiddellijk na het gebruik is dit - Non coprire le fessure di ventilazione con tovaglie, på baksidan är den här produkten varm under och product heet, behalve in de omgeving van de giornali, tende od oggetti analoghi. omedelbart efter användning. Vidrör inte varma bedieningstoetsen en de aansluitingen op het - Non posare sull'apparecchio sorgenti di fi amme punkter och särskilt inte ovansidan. Kontakt med achterpaneel. Raak geen hete plekken aan, vooral scoperte quali candele accese. varma ytor kan orsaka brännskador. niet het bovenpaneel. Contact met hete plekken - Smaltire le pile usate in conformità alle norme kan brandwonden veroorzaken. governative o disposizioni ambientali vigenti nel proprio paese o zona. Español - Lasciare 0,2 metro liberi tutto intorno l'unità. ADVERTENCIAS - Non mettere sull'apparecchiatura alcun contenitore - No exponga el equipo a la lluvia ni a la humedad. di liquido, come ad esempio dei vasi. - No extraiga la tapa del equipo. - Quando l'interruttore è nella posizione OFF, l'apparecchiatura non è completamente scollegata - No introduzca nada en el interior del equipo a da MAINS. través de los orifi cios de ventilación. - L’apparecchio va installato in prossimità della - No maneje el cable de alimentación con las fonte di alimentazione, in modo che quest’ultima manos mojadas. sia facilmente accessibile. - No cubra la ventilación con objetos como manteles, periódicos, cortinas, etc. - Non toccare i punti caldi né durante, né immediatamente dopo l’uso. - No deben colocarse sobre el equipo elementos con fuego, por ejemplo velas encendidas. - Durante, e subito dopo l’utilizzo, questo prodotto - Cuando se eliminen baterías usadas, deben risulta essere molto caldo in alcune sue parti come cumplirse las reglamentaciones oficiales o las ad esempio i connettori del pannello posteriore. normas de protección medioambiental aplicables Non toccare i punti caldi e specialmente la en su país o en su zona. superfi cie del pannello. Il contatto con parti calde può provocare ustioni. - Deje un espacio de unos 0,2 metro alrededor de la unidad. SETUP ...... 21 CONNECTIONS ...... 13 REMOTE CONTROLLER REAR PANEL ...... 8 FRONT PANEL ...... 6 ACCESSORIES ...... 5 FEATURES ...... 5 DESCRIPTION ...... 2 A NOTE ABOUTRECYCLING ...... 2 INTRODUCTION ...... 2 FOREWORD ...... 2 TABLE OFCONTENTS 3 SURROUNDSETUP ...... 32 2 SPKR(SPEAKER)SETUP ...... 26 1 INPUT SETUP ...... 23 ONSCREEN DISPLAY MENUSYSTEM ...... 21 CONNECTING OTHEREQUIPMENT ...... 20 CONNECTING FOR THE MULTI ROOM ...... 19 CONNECTING THE ANTENNA TERMINALS ...... 18 CONNECTING THE REMOTECONTROL JACKS ...... 17 ADVANCED CONNECTING ...... 17 CONNECTING VIDEOCOMPONENTS ...... 16 COMPONENTS CONNECTING AUDIO ...... 14 CONNECTING SPEAKERS ...... 13 SPEAKER PLACEMENT ...... 13 RC8001SR TOSR7001 ...... 12 GENERAL INFORMATION OF SETTING THETIME ...... 11 BATTERY REPLACEMENT INTERVAL ...... 11 LOADING BATTERIES ...... 11 REMOTE CONTROL RANGE ...... 11 LCD INDICATORS ...... 10 FUNCTIONS ...... 9 NAMES AND FL DISPLAY AND INDICATER ...... 7 COPYRIGHT ...... 2 EQUIPMENT MAINSWORKINGSETTING ...... 2 RC8001SR ...9 BASIC OPERATION (TUNER) OTHER FUNCTION ...... 45 SURROUND MODE ...... 41 BASIC OPERATION (PLAY BACK) RDS OPERATION ...... 51 PRESET MEMORY ...... 49 LISTENING TO THETUNER ...... 48 LIP.SYNC ...... 47 AUX2 INPUT ...... 47 7.1 CHINPUT ...... 47 SPEAKER A/B ...... 47 DISPLAY MODE ...... 46 SOURCE RECORDING ANANALOG ...... 46 DIGITAL INPUT ...... 46 AUDIO OR INPUT SELECTING ANALOGAUDIO VIDEO ON/OFF ...... 45 DOLBY HEADPHONEMODE ...... 45 LISTENING THROUGH HEADPHONES ...... 45 ATTENUATION TO ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL ...... 45 TV AUTO ON/OFFFUNCTION ...... 45 PURE DIRECT ...... 41 SOURCE DIRECT ...... 41 SURROUND ...... 41 SLEEPUSING THETIMER ...... 40 THE TEMPORARILY TURNINGOFF I/P CONVERT ...... 40 VIDEO CONVERT ...... 40 DIALOGUE NORMALIZATION MESSAGE ...... 39 CONTROL ...... 39 & TREBLE) ADJUSTING THETONE(BASS NIGHT MODE ...... 39 ADJUSTING THE MAINVOLUME ...... 39 MODE SURROUND SELECTING THE ...... 39 SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE ...... 39 6 ACOUSTIC EQ ...... 37 5 PREFERENCE ...... 35 4 VIDEOSETUP ...... 34 SOUND ...... 40 ...... 48 .....39 MULTI ROOM SYSTEM ...... 52 IETBTO UCIN .....VI DIRECT BUTTON FUNCTIONS ...... SETUP CODES ...... I DIMENSIONS ...... 65 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...... 65 TROUBLESHOOTING ...... 63 REMOTE CONTROLLER THE REMOTECONTROL FROMMULTI A ...... 53 OPERATION OF THE MULTI ROOMOUTPUTSWITH MULTI SPEAKER TERMINALS ...... 52 MULTI ROOMPLAYBACK USING THE OUT TERMINALS ...... 52 MULTI ROOMPLAYBACK USING THE MULTI ROOM HDMI ...... 64 SETUP ...... 62 CLONE MODE ...... 61 PROGRAMMING MACROS ...... 59 BASIC OPERATION ...... 56 CONTROLLING MARANTZCOMPONENTS ...... 54 OPERATION ...... 54 1 ENGLISH A list of available DVD A lm soundtracks that have been lm soundtracks that have been www.dolby.com. THX need not be activated for music, movies movies for music, be activated need not THX such as sports or shows TV, for especially made shows, etc. talk programming, for a small mixed were originally because they This is room environment. THX THX Ltd. of 2 are trademarks THX and Select Surround in some jurisdictions. may be registered Used with of Dolby Laboratories. EX is a trademark permission. DIgital Surround EX is a THX Surround EX—Dolby THX Laboratories and joint development of Dolby Ltd. fi In a movie theater, Surround EX technology encoded with Dolby Digital an extra channel which has are able to reproduce This mixing of the program. been added during the Back, places sounds channel, called Surround addition to the currently behind the listener in surround front right, available front left, front center, This right, surround left and subwoofer channels. more additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before. Digital Movies that were created using the Dolby when released into the Surround EX technology, to that home consumer market may exhibit wording list of movies created A on the packaging. effect Dolby using this technology can be found on the web site at software titles encoded with this technology an be software titles encoded with this technology found at www.thx.com. the Only receiver and controller products bearing THX Surround THX Surround EX logo, when in the EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology This product may also engage the in the home. of 5.1 THX Surround EX mode during the playback channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround EX eocnded. In such case, the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may not be very pleasing the depending on the particular soundtrack and tastes of the individual listener. Dolby “SURROUND EX™” is a trademark of Laboratories. Used under authorization. lm lm Ltd. ed by Lucasfi lters the information going to the lters the information going is an exclusive set of standards and and set of standards is an exclusive t from the THX mode when being viewed. t from the ¨ DESCRIPTION production company, Lucasfi lm Ltd. THX resulted resulted THX lm Ltd. Lucasfi company, production desire to reproduce the movie from George Lucas’ as possible both in the movie soundtrack as faithfully theater. theater and in the home patented technologies to THX engineers developed sound from a movie theater accurately translate the correcting the tonal and environment into the home, spatial errors that occur. is on, three THX mode of the SR7001 When the added: THX technologies are automatically distinct the correct tonal balance Re-Equalization-restores a home environment. for watching a movie in mixed to be brighter These sounds are otherwise Re-EQ compensates for for a large movie theater. from being overly this and prevents the soundtracks bright and harsh when played in a home theater. Matching-fi Timbre the surround speakers so they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from front speakers. front This ensures seamless panning between the and surround speakers. one Adaptive Decorrelation-slightly changes time and phase relationship with surround channel’s respect to the other surround channel. with This expands the listening position and creates only two surround speakers the same spacious with surround experience as in a movie theater multiple surround speakers. The Marantz SR7001 was required to pass a rigorous to series of quality and performance tests, in addition in incorporating the technologies explained above, certifi THX order to be THX requirements cover every aspect of performance including pre-amplifier and power amplifier other performance and operation, and hundreds of parameters in both the digital and analog domain. Digital, Movies which have been encoded in Dolby will all DTS, Dolby Pro Logic, stereo and Mono benefi THX mode should only be activated when The for watching movies which were originally produced a movie theater environment. technologies established by the world-renowned fi established by the world-renowned technologies THX guration This user guide covers the SR7001 and and SR7001 the covers guide user This the the SR7001 is given for though SR8001, belonging features of Explanations title. “SR8001 as to the SR8001 are indicated only only”. A NOTE ABOUT A NOTE RECYCLING INTRODUCTION This product’s packaging materials are recyclable packaging materials are recyclable This product’s This product and the accessories and can be reused. to the packed together are the applicable product WEEE directive except batteries. with Please dispose of any materials in accordance your local recycling regulations. local When discarding the unit, comply with your rules or regulations. Batteries should never be thrown away or incinerated local but disposed of in accordance with your regulations concerning chemical wastes. options, you are encouraged to discuss your own to discuss your own options, you are encouraged A/V setup with your Marantz particular home theater specialist dealer. Thank you for purchasing the Marantz SR7001/ the Marantz you for purchasing Thank receiver. SR8001 Surround been engineered component has This remarkable of home theater you with many years to provide to read this Please take a few minutes enjoyment. and operate before you connect manual thoroughly the SR7001/SR8001. connection and confi As there are a number of Right Rear or more or more 0.2 m (8 inchs) 0.2 m (8 inchs) R UP AUDIO L VIDEO VOLUME AUX 1 INPUT S-VIDEO DOWN DIGITAL R MultEQ C A/B LFE SURROUND L SPEAKERS DIGITAL SL S SR PCM MIC MEMORY CLEAR ANALOG AAC DIGITAL EQ ATT T-MODE Above 0.2 m (8 inchs) or more EXIT DISPLAY PEAK NIGHT BAND V-OFF MTX 6.1 ENTER SPKR A B DISC 6.1 ST MULTI TUNED SPEAKER MENU 7.1CH INPUT AUTO SURR DIRECT MULTI AUTO MULTI SLEEP DISP MODE AUTO SURROUND PURE DIRECT THX DSD PURE DIRECT PHONES AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001 INPUT SELECTOR STANDBY POWER ON/STANDBY Left or more

orders 0.2 m (8 inchs)

COPYRIGHT EQUIPMENT MAINS WORKING SETTING MAINS WORKING EQUIPMENT FOREWORD For heat dispersal, leave at least 0.2 m/8 inch of inch of For heat dispersal, leave at least 0.2 m/8 unit space between the top, back and sides of this and the wall or other components. ¥ Do not obstruct the ventilation holes. CAUTIONS ON INSTALLATION Recording and playback of any material may of any material may Recording and playback information refer to the require consent. For further following: — 1956 Act Copyright — Act 1958 Musical Performers Dramatic and — Acts 1963 and 1972 Performers Protection — enactments and Any subsequent statutory Your Marantz product has been prepared to comply been prepared to comply Marantz product has Your and safety requirements with the household power that exist in your area. AC only. powered by 230V SR7001/SR8001 can be This section must be read before any connection is any connection be read before must This section mains supply. made to the 2 ENGLISH accustomed todiscrete multichannel. limited surround itcanbedisappointingtousers improve separation, butbecauseofitsmono,band- simple matrixin thatitincludessteeringlogicto channel matrixstereomaterial. It isbetterthana channel andamonosurround fromtwo- The typicalmatrixdecoderoftoday derivesacenter and analogtelevisionbroadcasts. motion picturesavailableondisc and onVHStape; This isbecauseofthelargelibrary ofmatrixsurround there remainsaneedforhigh-quality matrixdecoding. But eveninhomesequippedfordiscretemultichannel, over matrixarewellknown. The advantagesofdiscretemultichannelsystems trademarks ofDigital Theater Systems,Inc. “DTS” and“DTSDigitalSurround”areregistered music onofDVD’s, LD’s, andCD’s. DTS canbeenjoyedinthehomeforeithermoviesor the moviemakerintended. Now, everymoviegoercanhearthesoundexactlyas neighborhood andhometheaters. an exactcopyofthestudiomasterrecordingsto standard ofqualityforcinemasoundbydelivering The nocompromiseDTSdigitalprocesssetsthe create fullrangedigitalsoundreproduction. DTS isamultichannelsoundsystemdesignedto digital soundtobothmoviesandmusic. DTS bringsyoupremiumqualitydiscretemultichannel of discretedigitalaudiointohometheatersystems. DTS wasintroducedin1994toprovide5.1channels soundtracks forhometheaterplayback. (e.g., THX Mode)whichaccuratelytranslatemovie technologies Select2 receiversalsofeatureproprietary THX operation forbothdigitalandanalogdomains. THX performance, andpre-amplifi er performanceand hundreds ofparameters,includingpoweramplifi years tocome. THX Select2requirementsdefi ne purchase willgiveyousuperbperformanceformany guarantee thattheHome Theater productsyou product featurethe THX Select2logo,which isyour quality andperformancetests.Onlythencana Select2 certifi Before anyhometheatercomponentcanbe THX THX Select2 ed, itmustpassarigorous seriesof er Digital Theater Systems,Inc. “DTS”, “DTS-ESand“Neo:6”aretrademarksof ES Discrete6.1andDTS-ESMatrix6.1. different surroundsignalrecordingmethods,asDTS- Extended Surroundincludestwosignalformatswith playback withatotalof6.1channels.DTS-ES offers theSB(SurroundBack)channelforsurround SL, SRandLFE),DTS-ESExtendedSurroundalso In additiontothe5.1surroundchannels(FL,FR,C, theaters since1999. format hasbeenusedprofessionallyinmovie thanks tofurtherexpandedsurroundsignals. This degree surroundimpressionandspaceexpression ES ExtendedSurroundgreatlyimprovesthe360- the conventionalDTSDigitalSurroundformat,DTS- Systems Inc.Whileoffering highcompatibilitywith digital signalformatdevelopedbyDigital Theater DTS-ES ExtendedSurroundisanewmultichannel Neo:6offers amusic modetoexpandstereo ¥ Neo:6technologyallowsvarioussoundelements ¥ Neo:6providesuptosixfull-bandchannelsof ¥ follow, Neo:6 offers severalimportantimprovements as aural characteristics. alias andreconstructionfi allow widerfrequencyresponseand theuseofanti- extended dynamicrange.Higher samplingrates delivery intothehome.Greater bit depthsprovide in highersamplingratesbothfor recordingandfor bit forsometime,andthereisincreasinginterest 44.1 kHz.Professionalaudiohasbeen20-or24- The stereoCDisa16-bitmediumwithsamplingat and integrityoftheoriginalstereorecording. layout, inawaywhichdoesnotdiminishthesubtlety nonmatrix recordingsintothefi from theoriginalpresentation. separately, andinawaywhichfollowsnaturally within achannelorchannelstobesteered the standardhome-theaterspeakerlayouts. separate channels,respectively, correspondingto with 6.1and5.1systemswillderivesixfi matrix decodingfromstereomaterial.Users lters withmore favorable ve- or six-channel or ve- ve with conventional ProLogicdecoders.) surround channels.(Suchmaterial isalsocompatible Dolby SurroundProLogic effects. channels, andasixth(“.1”)channelforlow-frequency screen channels,independentleftandrightsurround to fi As withfi lm sound,DolbyDigitalcanprovideup coding forsuchconsumerformatsasDVDandDTV. Dolby Digitalidentifi Theater Systems,Inc. “DTS” and“DTS96/24”aretrademarksofDigital 4. 96/24 5.1-channelsoundwithfull-qualityfull- No newplayerrequired:DTS96/24canbecarried 3. 2. Full backwardcompatibilitywith allexisting 1. Sound qualitytransparenttotheoriginal96/24 DTS 96/24offers thefollowing: and analogelectronicsprovidedintheplayer. provided, necessitatingtheuseofD/A converters new playerisneeded,andonlyanalogoutputsare DVD-audio allows96/24insixchannels,buta This capabilityhashadlittleuse. two channels,andwithseriouslimitationsonpicture. deliver 24-bit,96kHzaudiointothehome,butonlyin When DVD-videoappeared,itbecamepossibleto titles. encoded atarateof96kHz/24bitsonDVD-Video DTS 96/24allowsfor5.1channelsoundtrackstobe Logic encoded specifi cally totakefulladvantageofPro Pro Logic programming isfullycompatiblewith DolbySurround to automotivesound.Whileconventional surround and isideallysuitedtobringthesurround experience soundfi material; providesaconvincingthree-dimensional and directionalityonDolbySurroundprogram decoding technologythatprovidesbetterspatiality picture soundtracksonDVD-video. motion video,formusicprogramsand accessible toallDVDplayers. on DVD-video,orinthevideozoneofDVD-audio, signal) decoders. (Existingdecoderswilloutputa48kHz master. ve full-rangechannelsforleft,center, andright II eld onconventionalstereomusicrecordings; playback,includingseparateleft andright II decoders,soundtrackswillbeable tobe es theuse of DolbyDigitalaudio II isanimprovedmatrix stereo material. Headphone alsodeliversexceptional3Daudiofrom immersive, hometheaterlisteningexperience.Dolby solve thisproblemandprovidesanon-fatiguing, utilizes patentedheadphoneperspectivecurvesto greatly fromtraditionalspeakerplayback.Dolby the pinnaofear, thelisteningexperiencediffers Since theheadphonespeakerdriversarecovering is fundamentallydifferent thanlisteningtospeakers. movies overheadphones,thelisteningexperience When listeningtomultichannelcontentsuchasDVD surround soundlisteningexperienceoverheadphones. The DolbyHeadphonetechnologyprovidesa About Dolby Pro Logic Surround EX. movies soundtracksrecordedwithDolbyDigital best results,DolbyDigitalEXshouldbeusedwith channels fromthetwoinoriginalrecording.For using amatrixdecoderthatderivesthreesurround channels from5.1-channelsources. This isdone Dolby DigitalEXcreatessixfull-bandwidthoutput experience. content intoaseamless6.1-or7.1-channellistening stereo or Advanced Resolution5.1-channelmusic spatiality. Itcanalsoprocessanyhigh-quality television programswithenhanceddepthand Dolby Surroundencodedvideocassettesand decode thethousandsofcommerciallyavailable Surround ProLogictechnologyandcanoptimally Dolby ProLogic 5.1-channel encodedsources. the entertainmentexperiencefromstereoaswell complete surroundsoundsolutionthatmaximizes decoding technologies,DolbyProLogic Dolby's expertiseinsurroundsoundandmatrix to thehometheaterenvironment. A productof and immersing7.1-channellisteningexperience Dolby ProLogic II II x isfullycompatiblewithDolby x technologydeliversanatural II x II x isa 3 ENGLISH of-phase relative to the others. It measures the the It measures to the others. relative of-phase listening from the main loudspeaker to each distance sound from so that the delays and adjusts position time. Finally, the same arrives at loudspeaker each playback level of determines the Audyssey MuitEQ volume trims so and adjusts the each loudspeaker are equal. that all levels MultEQ logo are Audyssey MultEQ and the All rights Laboratories, Inc. Audyssey trademarks of reserved.

ections cant problems that are cant problems that are full- ers and whether they es how many loudspeakers are es oor, and the ceiling in the room. Even in the room. Even and the ceiling oor, Furthermore, MultEQ correction is applied both both Furthermore, MultEQ correction is applied are in frequency and time domains and so there modal no artifacts (such as smearing of sound or ringing)that are sometimes associated with traditional methods of room equalization. In addition to correcting frequency response problems Audyssey MultEQ over a wide listening area, set- provides a completely automated sound system up process. It identifi connected to the amplifi one range, satellites, or subwoofers. If there is a least Audyssey MultEQ determines subwoofer connected, the optimum crossover frequency between each satellite and the subwoofer(s). It automatically checks the polarity of each loudspeaker and alerts the user if there are any that may be wired out- caused by room acoustics. These include refl These caused by room acoustics. is to apply room correction The solution to this problem how each loudspeaker after precisely measuring causes interacts with the room. Because the room of the variations in the frequency response seat, it loudspeakers that are so large from seat to several is important to measure each loudspeaker at This should be done locations in the listening room. Measurement at a even if there is only one listener. single location is not representative of the acoustical problems in the room and will in most cases, degrade Audyssey MultEQ is the only overall performance. for technology that can achieve room correction so multiple listeners in a large listening area. It does in by combining the data collected at several points the room from each loudspeaker and then applying of correction that minimizes the acoustical effects the room and is matched to the frequency resolution of human perception (known as psychoacoustics). There are several factors that can degrade the sound the sound can degrade factors that are several There a listening room. best loudspeakers in from even the of sound important is the interaction One of the most surfaces such as with large from the loudspeakers walls, the fl and acoustical loudspeaker placement with careful there are signifi treatments, and standing waves that are from nearby surfaces parallel surfaces in the room. created between large is further complicated In a home theater the situation The listening locations. because there are several arriving at of room acoustics on the sound effects is and the result ears are very different each person’s that is degraded in a different a listening experience the room. It is not uncommon way for every person in adjacent seats that are as to have variations in two in the frequency range large as 10 dB, particularly below 250 Hz. ) is a ) is a ¨ nition Multimedia at, digital imitation. and High-Defi (High Defi nition Compatible Digital nition Compatible (High Defi ¨ HDCD system manufactured under license from under license from HDCD system manufactured one or more This product is covered by Microsoft. United States 5,479,168 of the following: In the 5,838,274 5,854,600 5,638,074 5,640,161 5,808,574 with Australia 669,114 5,872,531 and in 5,864,311 other patents pending. of Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks HDMI Licensing LLC. patented process for delivering on Compact Disc the for delivering on patented process microphone and details of the original full richness feed. because they are CDs sound better HDCD encoded information as 20-bits of real musical encoded with all other CDs. compared to 16-bits for limitation of the 16-bit CD HDCD overcomes the system to encode format by using a sophisticated onto the CD while remaining the additional four bits with the CD format. completely compatible recordings, you hear more When listening to HDCD 3-D sound stage, and dynamic range, a focused and musical timbre. With extremely natural vocal of the depth and emotion HDCD, you get the body, a fl original performance not HDMI, the HDCD

and and TruBass and TruBass ruBass, SRS decoder creates a II larity is designed to enable II can enable the dialog II larity, T ) is a powerful and versatile II provides composite stereo rear , Dialog C II II (CS- , Dialog C II II . II symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.

is packed with other useful feature like dialog is packed with other useful feature like dialog II

channels to greatly improve separation and image channels to greatly improve separation and to positioningÐ adding a heightened sense of realism A/V productions. both audio and listening environment that places the listener “inside” listening environment that places the listener “inside” music performances and dramatically improves both hi-fi audio conventional surround-encoded video material. CS- up to 6.1 multichannel surround sound playback up to 6.1 multichannel surround sound playback other from mono, stereo, CS encoded sources and matrix encoded sources. In all cases the decoder and a extends it into 6 channels of surround audio The CS- LFE/subwoofer signal. Dolby Virtual Speaker retains all the original the original Speaker retains all Dolby Virtual and provides the Multichannel audio information of being surrounded by listener with the sensation additional speakers. Circle Surround to become clearer and more discernable in movies to become clearer and more discernable in movies in and it enables the bass frequencies contained the original programming to more closely achieve low frequenciesÐovercoming the low frequency limitations of the speakers by full octave. Circle Surround SRS technology are incorporated under license from Labs, Inc. CS- bass clarity (SRS Dialog) for movies and cinema-like enrichment (TruBass). CS- Circle Surround multichannel technology. CS- multichannel technology. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double- “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround of Dolby Laboratories. D symbol are trademarks Dolby Virtual Speaker is a technologycertified is a technologycertified Speaker Dolby Virtual a virtualized that creates by Dolby Laboratories speakers using experience from two surround sound Additionally, Dolby Digital source. a multichannel simulate the surround Speaker can Dolby Virtual Dolby Pro Logic or Dolby produced by sound effect Pro Logic 4 ENGLISH well. functions andcan beusedforsystemoperationas control allowsfull accesstoalloftheoperating An easy-to-useprogrammable, learningremote video outputs. information throughthe Y/C (S-video)andcomposite Furthermore, theSR7001can outputtheOSD output versatilityistakentoastunning newlevel. video convertsystemandaspeaker-B andOSD Audio CDMultiChannel(7.1channel)directinputs, digital inputs(7total),4componentinputs,Super analog anddigitalinputs/outputs.With6assignable speaker bindingpostsandanextensivearrayofboth communication port,Flasherinput,heavyduty multisource, assignableDCtrigger, aRS-232C dealers andconsumers.Itfeaturesmulti-room/ extensive feedbackfromcustominstallationexperts, The SR7001isdesignedandengineeredwith had intended. harmony torecreatetheemotion,exactlyasartist customized components,allelementsworkin and dynamicrange. Together withhand-selected video sectionsformaximumseparation,clarity are incorporatedfortheFL display, audioand the 7channels.Independentpowersupplycircuits Crystal Digital SignalProcessingcircuitry, alongwitha The SR7001incorporatesthemostadvanced in castaluminumheatsinks. capacitors, andfullydiscreteoutputstageshoused an advanced,premiumhigh-storagepowersupply the 7mainchannelspowerampsectionfeatures 110 watts(SR7001)/125(SR8001)toeachof substantial dynamicabilityathighsoundlevels. Enormous powerreservesendowthesystemwith diffi 7ch amplifi • THX Select2certifi technology, today! Logic Pro-Logic and Matrix6.1),DTSNeo:6(Cinema,Music),Dolby Dolby DigitalEX,Digital,DTSES(Discrete6.1 digital surroundsounddecodingtechnologysuchas The SR7001incorporatesthelatestgenerationof 232C communicationport,theS utilizing pre-outjacks,7.1directinputsandaRS- In addition,Marantzhasfocusedonthefuture.By II FEATURES (Cinema,MusicandMono). cult conditionsfoundinlargerooms. II ¨ x (Movie,MusicandGame),CircleSurround 192kHz/24bitD/A converterineachof ershaveenoughpowerforeventhemost II (Movie,MusicandGame),DolbyPro- ed R7001 is tomorrow’s tomorrow’s Auto Adjust Function forSpeakerDistanceSettings ¥ ImprovedStation NameInputMethod,60Presets ¥ AutoInputSignal Detection ¥ DolbyProLogic ¥ DolbyProLogic ¥ DolbyDigitalEX,Digital,DTSES ¥ THX/ THX SurroundEX ¥ this receiver, refertoitsinstructionmanual. support HDCP. Beforeconnectingacomponentto component (suchasavideoplayerormonitor)must video content.Boththisreceiverandtheconnected device authentication.Itspurposeistoprotectdigital technology thatconsistsofdataencodingandother Content Protection).HDCP iscopyright protection This receiversupportsHDCP (High-bandwidthDigital Copyright Protection of Super Audio CD. transmission ofDSD(DirectStreamDigital)signals Ver. 1.2supports1-bitaudioformattingandenables support HDMIVer. 1.1. Ver. 1.2.andtheHDMIoutputjacksofthistransmitter The HDMIinputjacksofthisreceiversupport single cable. video, HDMIenablesaudio/videoconnectionviaa multiple cableswerepreviouslyneededforaudio/ audio signalsinadditiontovideosignals.Where standard. Itaddscapabilitiesfordigitallytransmitting enhancement totheDVI(DigitalVisual Interface) HDMI (High-Defi nition MultimediaInterface)isan • HDMI entertainment setup. The SR7001isheretoperforminyourunrivaledhome selectors andvolumecontrolsareintuitivelyplaced. the SR7001,buttonsarekepttoaminimum.Source and completelysymmetrical.Onthefrontpanelof The newgenerationofMarantzReceiversisstylish ¥ RS-232C Terminal forFutureUpgradeorSystem ¥ LargeHeavyDutySpeaker Terminals forall ¥ Video Off Mode ¥ 32bitDigitalSurroundProcessingChipsets ¥ 192kHz/24bitDACforall8Channels ¥ MassiveEnergyPowerSupply,¥ HugeEI HighPowerCurrentFeedbackCircuitry ¥ ¥ 7 AudysseyMultEQ ¥ ¥ Circle Surround (Delay Time) HDMI) (Composite, S-Video, Componentvideoand Set UpMenuviaallVideo Output (SR8001: 7 (Discrete 6.1,MatrixNeo:6) Control Channels Transformer, LargeELCO’s. × 110 Watts (8Ohms),Discrete Amplifi × 125Watts) II II II (Cinema,Music,Mono) (Movie,Music,Game) x (Movie,Music,Game) ers

MultiRoomBoutput(SR8001only) ¥ EmitterOutput(SR8001only) ¥ IRReceverInput(SR8001only) ¥ ¥ Flasher Input SelectableMultiRoomComponentVideo output ¥ Troidal Core Transformer (SR8001only) ¥ AssignableDC Trigger Output ¥ Two componentmonitoroutputs ¥ DSDtoPCMconverter ¥ DSDdirectconversion ¥ 9bandsx7chGEQ ¥ Source/PureDirectmode ¥ ¥ Bi-amp drive ¥ Dolby Headphone ¥ HDCD ¥ Function Rename LipSync(AudioDelay) ¥ AssignableVideo Input ¥ ¥ Video I/P Converter S-Video HDMI Video convertsystem ¥ Programmable,learningremotecontrol ¥ FrontOptical AUX Input ¥ Remote Controller RC8001SR ACCESSORIES (SR8001 only) (Digital Camera,PortableDVD) ← ↔ ComponentVideo CompositVideo TUNER TAPE CLEAR TV CH MENU 7.1CH PREV TEST DISP OFF 7 4 1 12 AUX1 DVD Learning RemoteController CD POWER SOURCE LIP.SYNC ON/OFF RC8001SR CH.SEL GUIDE LIGHT THX OSD ATT OK 0 8 5 2 AUX2 CD-R VCR MUTE SPK-AB MEMO SLEEP SURR VOL EXIT ON 9 6 3 DSS AMP MD D5 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 M ↔

User Guide Front AUX Jack Cover FM Antenna AM LoopAntenna batteries AAA-size AC cable Microphone

PUSH PUSH × 3 5 ENGLISH

→ ) lights up SOURCE SOURCE DISP Function name Function name → Surround Mode / ENTER button ) → 3 , 2 ” appears. After 2 seconds, ” appears. , ∞ Display Off Display Off , → 5 player. ” appears on the FL display. If pressed If pressed display. FL on the ” appears PURE DIRECT Cursor ( Cursor PURE DIRECT button and indicator and button DIRECT PURE AUTO when the pure direct function is turned on. when the pure direct function AUTO automatically as follows. • The surround mode is automatically switched to to is automatically switched The surround mode • speaker configurations are fixed Additionally, • Front SPKR = LARGE Center SPKR = LARGE Surround SPKR = LARGE Surround Back SPKR = LARGE YES Sub woofer = 8 9 0 1 2 5 6 7 MENU button MENU button EXIT button DISPLAY / MIC jack MultEQ button button THX 7.1CH INPUT button ! MAIN This button is used to enter the SETUP MENU. ! MAIN Use these buttons when operating the SETUP TUNER function. MENU and @ MAIN This button is used to exit from the SETUP MENU. @ display mode When this button is pressed, the FL is changed as Input display @ Press to automatically measure speaker characteristics using the included microphone. (See page 27) ! “ once, is pressed this button When DIRECT again, “ goes out. display indication the FL the tone control direct mode, In the source/pure bypassed. bass management are circuitry and Notes: ! for input THX processing Press this button to select source. ! Press this button to select the output of an external multichannel Auto-display Off indicator ( display and the display off OFF. is condition DISPLAY

R UP

AUDIO

VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

S-VIDEO

DIGITAL ” indicator will be illuminated in the illuminated will be ” indicator

PUSHPUSH ” indicator lights in the auto stereo mode. ” indicator lights in the MULTI (See page 52) INFRARED receiving sensor window AUTO Front AUX Jack Cover Jack AUX Front 0 1 2 3 4 MULTI SPEAKER button SPEAKER MULTI button BAND button T-MODE MEMORY button MEMORY button CLEAR knob control VOLUME INPUT jacks AUX1 Press this button to select the auto stereo mode or Press this button to select FM band is selected. mono mode when the The “ (See page 48) ! the tuner preset memory Press this button to enter (See page 49) numbers or station names. ! cancel the station-memory Press this button to scan tuning. (See page 50) setting mode or preset ! remote This window receives infrared signals for the control. ! the control Turning Adjusts the overall sound level. clockwise increases the sound level. ! the These auxiliary video/audio input jacks accept portable DVD, game connections of a camcorder, the etc. When not using these jacks, protect with included jack covers. Cover Jack AUX the Front to Attach How u Speaker the Multiroom to activate this button Press “ system. i AM in FM and to switch between Press this button the TUNER mode. o display. display. 4 ! R UP AUDIO 3 L ! VIDEO VOLUME AUX 1 INPUT S-VIDEO 2 DOWN DIGITAL ! 3 @ 2 1 @ ! 0 R 1 MultEQ C A/B LFE SURROUND L SPEAKERS DIGITAL SL S SR ” indicator will be illuminated in the display. ” indicator will be illuminated in the display. HEADPHONE jack for stereo headphones for HEADPHONE jack @ 0 PCM change to STEREO and Dolby Headphone by change to STEREO and Dolby Headphone by MENU and Cursor button. as soon as the headphone plug is removed from the jack. MIC MEMORY CLEAR ANALOG AAC DIGITAL • When using headphones, the surround mode will When using headphones, the surround mode will • • The surround mode returns to the previous setting (Multi Room) button MULTI MODE button SURROUND button surround) (Auto AUTO

@ EQ ATT T-MODE EXIT MULTI DISPLAY PEAK y Press this button to activate the Multiroom system. “ r can select the surround mode by pressing this You button. t mode from AUTO Press this button to select the the surround modes. When this mode is selected, mode the receiver determines the surround corresponding to a digital input signal automatically. (See page 52) e This jack may be used to listen to the SR7001’s certain output through a pair of headphones. Be stereo that the headphones have a standard 1/4” will phono plug. Note that the main room speakers when the headphone automatically be turned off jack is in use. Notes: NIGHT 9 BAND io! V-OFF MTX 6.1 ENTER ! SPKR A B DISC 6.1 ST 8 MULTI TUNED SPEAKER MENU 7.1CH INPUT ! AUTO SURR DIRECT u 7 MULTI AUTO MULTI ! SLEEP y DISP 6 MODE AUTO SURROUND PURE DIRECT THX DSD t ! 5 switch is in the PURE DIRECT r ! button on the remote rst, and then choose a ors, such as TV, DVD, DVD, TV, such as ors, POWER POWER e PHONES AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001 POWER POWER indicator lights up when this unit indicator lights up when this unit INPUT SELECTOR w STANDBY POWER ON/OFF switch set to the ON position, pressing the button also allows to turn the power on.

indicator INPUT SELECTOR knob (AUDIO/ VIDEO) knob (AUDIO/ INPUT SELECTOR STANDBY STANDBY

and STANDBY switch POWER FRONT PANEL PANEL FRONT VCR1, DSS and AUX1 select video and audio AUX1 select video and audio VCR1, DSS and simultaneously. Audio function sources such as TAPE, CD/CDR, CD/CDR, TAPE, Audio function sources such as AUX2 may be selected in conjunction TUNER and source. with a Video sound This feature (Sound Injection) combines a from one source with a picture from another. Choose the video source ﬁ control unit. the When this unit is in the standby mode with POWER ENTER The remote is the standby mode (power OFF) by the control unit. w This knob is used to select the input sources. select The video function source to activate this function. audio different ON position, the power of this unit can be turned ON/ ON position, the power of this unit can be turned OFF by pressing the Press the button to turn the power ON, and press Press the button to turn the power ON, and If the again to turn it OFF. q 6 ENGLISH Caution: not usingthesecontrols. lower partofthepanel.Keepdoorclosedwhen panel door, openthedoorbygentlypressingon When youwanttousethecontrolsbehindfront Opening andclosing thefront paneldoor B. Press thisbuttontoselectspeakersystems A and/or @ SPEAKERA/Bbutton 3 • Be carefulnottopinchyourﬁ

door andthepanel.

E ST

AN O

F Y

AV SURROUNDRE

PHONES

IVE

R SR7001

D S

I L

T T

O I

S A

U U

R T

R O

T D

S D

T IS

MTX

B TE

H A

T K

AA A

A C

L PC

D S L

U IG

L R

C F IT

R E S

R L

N R

DOWN

S-VI

U V

X 1 O

EO UT L

ngers betweenthe A

DIO

UP R

function isactive. This indicatorisilluminatedwhen theVideo-OFF j decoding mode(Discrete6.1orMatrix 6.1). These indicatorswillilluminateto show theDTS-ES h g SURROUND modeisinuse. This indicatorisilluminatedtoshowthatthe AUTO f system isactive. This indicatorisilluminatedwhenthemulti-room d function inthemain-roomisuse. This indicatorisilluminatedwhenthesleeptimer s the displayoff condition. This indicatorisilluminatedwhentheSR7001in a FL DISPLAY AND INDICATER ST(Stereo) ¡ V(video)-OFFmodeindicator TUNER’s indicators AUTO SURR Multi-room systemindicator SLEEPtimerindicator DISP(Display Off)indicator 9 TUNED ¡ (Auto Surround mode)indicator DTS-ES modeindicators (DISC6.1, MTX6.1) AUTO 8 : Thisindicatorilluminateswhenan : Thisindicatorilluminateswhen : : Thisindicatorilluminateswhenthe : condition. FM stationisbeingtunedintostereo acceptable listeningquality. sufﬁ cient signalstrengthtoprovide a stationisbeingreceivedwith tuner’s tuner’s Auto modeisinuse. DISP SLEEP a s MULTI d AUTO f SURR AUTO ¡ DIRECT TUNED g 7 ST DISC 6.1 h V – j OFF ¡ MTX 6.1MTX 6 NIGHT k¡ SPKR l input. This indicatoris illuminated whenaDTSsignal is dts signal isinput. This indicatorisilluminatedwhen a DolbyDigitalEX EX signal isinput. This indicatorisilluminatedwhen aDolbyDigital 2 ¡ source hasbeenselected. This indicatorisilluminatedwhenananaloginput ¡ selected. This indicatorlightswhenadigitalinputhasbeen ¡ function isactive. This indicatorisilluminatedwhentheattenuation ¡ the this willilluminate.Ifhappens,youshouldpress greater thanthecapablelevelofinternalprocessing, signal. Iftheselectedanalogaudioinputsignalis This indicatorisamonitorforananalogaudioinput ¡ indicator. Active speakersystemwillbeilluminatedbythis l digital programmaterialatlowvolumelevels. the Nightmode,whichreducesdynamicrangeof This indicatorisilluminatedwhentheSR7001in k PEAK SIGNALFORMAT indicators ANALOGinputindicator DIGITAL InputIndicator ATT (Attenuation) indicator PEAK indicator

4 3 2 1 0 SPKR(speaker)ABindicator NIGHTmodeindicator AB DIGITAL ATT 0 ATT ¡ buttonontheremote.(Seepage9) ¡ 1 DIGITAL 2 ANALOG ¡ PCM 3 ™ 0 LSSR S SL DIGITAL SURROUND L ¡ ¡ LFE 4 C 5 R ™ 1 “ or DTS-ESsignalcomesin,“ If DolbyDigital5.1chsignalwithSurroundEXfl displayed. signal is2channelPCM-audio,“ “ connected tothe input andalinkisestablished. This indicatorilluminateswhenan HDMIdeviceis ™ light up. When HDCDsignalisdecoded, thisindicatorwill ™ the PUREDIRECT mode. This indicatorisilluminatedwhentheSR7001in ¡ audio signalincludedintheHDMIinputsignal. Digital) signalofanSuper Audio CDisinputviathe This indicatorilluminateswhenaDSD(DirectStream ¡ the SOURCEDIRECT mode. This indicatorisilluminatedwhentheSR7001in ¡ other aspectsofunit’s operation. input source,surroundmode,tuner, volumelevelor This displayshowsmessagesrelatingtothestatus, ¡ Dolby Digital5.1chorDTS5.1ch,“ input signal.Iftheselecteddigitalsignalis encoded withadigital These indicatorsdisplaythechannelsthatare ¡ signal isinput. This indicatorisilluminatedwhenaDolbySurround 2 PCM (pulsecodemodulation). This indicatorisilluminatedwhentheinputsignal PCM is input. This indicatorisilluminatedwhenaDTS96/24signal 96/24 is input. This indicatorisilluminatedwhenaDTSESsignal ES SR SR HDMI indicator HDCD indicator PUREDIRECTindicator DSD indicator SOURCEDIRECTindicator MainInformation Display SURROUND 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 ” and“ ” and“ ENCODED CHANNELSTATUS indicators LFE LFE ” willbeilluminated. ” willbeilluminated.Ifthedigitalinput L ”, “ C L L ” and“ ”, “ ”, “ R C ”, “ ”, “ R SL R ” willbe ”, “ ”, “ SL S ag ” , ”, 7 ENGLISH er is used, er is used, er. er, connect a “Y” er, cient for drive capability. Connect to a multi-room remote control Connect to a multi-room remote control device, available from your Marantz dealer. with remote control (RC-5) terminals in Multi zone (Multi room). FLASHER IN (Flasher input terminal) IN/OUT terminals REMOTE ROOM MULTI (L, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, C) SBR, SBL, SR, SL, R, (L, ers. not suffi • It is This output voltage is for (status) control only, 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 IR RECEIVER IN (SR8001 only) TRIGGER output terminal DC Preamp Outputs Outputs Preamp Output Subwoofer INPUT or AUX2 7.1 CHANNEL EMITTER OUT (SR8001 only) The signals input to the IR RECEIVER IN terminals The signals input to the IR RECEIVER IN terminals can be are output to this terminal. External devices controlled by connecting them to this terminal. ! Connect to an external IR receiver. ! each These terminals are to control the unit from etc. zone. Connect the control signal from a Keypad, ! by DC Connect a device that needs to be triggered etc…) under certain conditions (screen, power strip, the Use the system OSD setup menu to determine conditions by which these jack will be active. Note: ! IN: OUT: Connect to the Marantz component equipped ! SL right), C (Center), R (front (front left), for L Jacks (surround SBL SR (surround right), (surround left), right). SBR (surround back back left) and to external power jacks for connection Use these amplifi ! line level input of a powered Connect this jack to the subwoofer amplifi If an external subwoofer. er input. subwoofer amplifi connect this jack to the either powered or If you are using two subwoofers, amplifi with a 2 channel subwoofer output jack and run one connector to the subwoofer amplifi cable from it to each subwoofer ! Audio CD Super Audio player, By connecting a DVD or other components that has a multichannel player, can playback the audio with multichannel port, you outputs. 5.1 channel or 7.1 channel !

(MULTI SPEAKER / SPEAKER C) / SPEAKER SPEAKER (MULTI plugged into these outlets should be powered up plugged into these outlets should be powered up before the SR7001 is turned on. connect devices that consume electricity more than AC outlets. If the total power the capacity of these consumption of the connected devices exceeds the circuit shuts down the power the protection capacity, supply. • thumps, anything In order to avoid potential turn-off Do not AC outlet is 150W. The capacity of this • 0 C switch SPEAKER OUTLETS AC terminals outputs Speaker Sub outputs terminals Speaker AC INLET AC ! and INLET AC Plug the supplied power cord into this then into the power outlet on the wall. AC only. SR7001 can be powered by 120V Nine terminals are provided for the front (A) left, front Nine terminals are provided front (B) right, front center, (A) right, front (B) left, right, surround back left and surround left, surround surround back right speakers. i bi-amp to this receiver or set Set to ON to connect a connection (surround to OFF for normal speaker (See page 19) back and multiroom speakers). o cables of components such as AC power Connect the and a DVD and CD player to these outlets. SWITCHED UNSWITCHED outlets are provided. only The one marked SWITCHED provides power for when the SR7001 is turned on and is useful your components which you use every time you play system. live as The one marked UNSWITCHED is always long as the SR7001 is plugged into a live outlet. component connected here may be left on A with via its own be switched off or may permanently, power switch. Caution: y left, and right for the front provided are terminals Two multi room. speakers for a third set of can be used to connect The terminals C selector switch setting the SPEAKER speakers by page 19. connection and use, see to ON. For u u A B CEN TER SURR. FRONT FRONT SPEAKER SYSTEMS FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR. SURR BACK : MINIMUM 6 OHMS FRONT A + B : MINIMUM 8 OHMS L L R R R ON OFF i L LL R R /SPEAKER C o MULTI SPEAKER SUB SPEAKER SWITCHED 0.65A 150W AC OUTLET 230V 50/60Hz y 0 AC IN ! 1 MODEL NO. SR8001 t ! 2 ! IN A/B, Video) A/B, ers or video display devices to listen and view ers or video display devices to listen and 7.1CH 2 1 PUT PUT OUT OUT MONITOR OUT MONITOR RS-232C output Outputs (Audio Multiroom r RS-232C R 3 S-VIDEO P / R C r These are monitor outputs and each one includes gurations. both composite video and S-video conﬁ When connecting two video monitors or televisions, with be aware that the OSD interface can be used connections. OUT both MONITOR t with The RS-232C port is to be used in conjunction of the an external controller to control the operation SR7001 by using an external device. to The RS-232C port may also be used in the future update the operating software of the SR7001 so that it will be able to support new digital audio formats and the like as they are introduced. e for the These are the audio and video output jacks Multi zone (Multi room). power Connect these jacks to optional audio ampliﬁ in a the source selected by the multiroom system remote room. BACK OUT SURROUND B P / ! MONI. OUT 4 B HDMI Ver1.2 C ) 4 ( PRE OUT ) IN OUT DSS/VCR2 ! 5 6 SL AUX2 ( ) 3 R C C ( SW SW L RSR P / R VCR1 C OUT ! EMITTER 1 2 SBL SBL SBR SBR B ) P / AB IN OUT B C ) 1 ( IR IN e ) TV DSS/VCR2 ( RECEIVER DVD ( 6 ) 2 ( IN INPUT 4 DVD FLASHER INPUT 2 1 2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 SL SR ) directly from ) R P ) / ! R 7 R TV VCR1 ( C ( Y L R DC OUT ) INPUT 1 INPUT 3 B P / , C e B C ! B 8 DSS/VCR2 ( MULTI OUT INPUT 4 AUDIO YY OUT OUT ! MONITOR 9 IN ) VCR1 ( RC-5RC MULTI OUT ) IN OUT TV ! ( INPUT 3 TAPE CD/CDR OUT MULTI IN COAX. OPT. VIDEO INPUT 1 COMPONENT OUT DIGITAL IN ) ) 4 ( IN IN DSS/VCR2 DVD ( DIGITAL OUT ANTENNA DSS/VCR2 OUT INPUT 2 OUT VCR1 ) IN 3 ( 3 VCR1 DVD IN ) 5 2 2 ( qw GND AM DVD ) ) L Ω 4 1 R 1 ( 75 ( TV FM TV VIDEO

OUTPUT 1 3 2 0

COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT/ VIDEO COMPONENT FM antenna terminal (75 ohms) REAR PANEL REAR @ @ @ the recorded DVD signal or other video component the recorded DVD signal or other video component to and two component video outputs connector display output it directly into the matrix decoder of the device. By sending the pure DVD component video signal the DVD signal forgoes the extra processing directly, The result is that normally would degrade the image. with incredibly life like vastly increased image quality, colors and crisp detail. @ If your DVD player or other device has component If your DVD player or other device has component these video connectors, be sure to connect them to The component video connectors on the SR7001. to SR7001 has 4 component video input connectors C obtain the color information (Y, w Connect the supplied AM loop antenna. Use the AM loop antenna. Use the Connect the supplied AM The supplied terminals marked “AM” and “GND”. in most AM reception loop antenna will provide good the areas. Position the loop antenna until you hear best reception. Connect an external FM antenna with a coaxial coaxial Connect an external FM antenna with a cable, or a cable network FM source. terminals AM antenna and ground q 8 ENGLISH outputs.) system. (Seepage15)(TheSR8001 has2HDMI input functioncanbeselectedfromtheOSDmenu This unithas4HDMIinputsand1output. The @ recordings. connected tovideotaperecordersformaking The 2videooutputchannelscanbeusedto other videocomponentstotheinputs. conﬁ gurations. ConnectVCRs,DVDplayers, and one includesbothcompositevideoandS-video are 4videoinputsand2outputseach These arethevideoinputsandoutputs. There @ components. recorders, CDDAT decks,orothersimilar The digitaloutputscanbeconnectedtoMD optical output. For digitaloutput,thereis1coaxialoutputand component. compact disc,LD,DVD,orotherdigitalsource The inputsacceptdigitalaudiosignalsfroma jacks. are 3digitalinputswithcoaxialjacks,optical These arethedigitalaudioinputsandoutputs. There @ require RCA-typeconnectors. players andetc.... The audioinputsandoutputs for cassettetapedecks,compactdiscplayers,DVD video outputs). The audiojacksare nominallylabeled inputs) and4audiooutputs(2ofwhicharelinkedto are 6audioinputs(4ofwhichlinkedtovideo These aretheanalogaudioinputsandoutputs. There @ remote control(RC-5)terminals. Connect toaMarantzcomponentequippedwith ! HDMIINPUT/OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT(Dig.1-6)/ AUDIO IN/OUT(TV, DVD, VCR1, REMOTE CONT. IN/OUTterminals 3 2 1 0 9 VCR2) VIDEO IN/OUT(TV, DVD, VCR1, DSS/ OUTPUT (coaxial, optical) DSS/VCR2, TAPE,CD/CDR)

RC8001SR REMOTE CONTROLLER NAMES AND FUNCTIONS NAMES AND ⁄ ⁄ ⁄ ⁄ ¤ ¤ 6 7 8 9 0 1 TUNER TAPE CLEAR TV CH MENU 7.1CH PREV TEST DISP OFF 7 4 1 12 AUX1 DVD Learning RemoteController CD POWER SOURCE LIPáSYNC ON/OFF RC8001SR CH.SEL GUIDE LIGHT OSD ATT THX OK 0 8 5 2 AUX2 CD-R VCR MUTE SPK-AB MEMO SLEEP SURR VOL EXIT ON 9 6 3 DSS AMP MD D5 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 M z x ⁄ ⁄ ⁄ ⁄ ⁄ ⁄ . , m n b v c 5 4 3 2 1 0 text displaycanalsobechanged. operations canbeperformedforasinglesource. The x remote controlswhenusingthelearningfunction. AV equipment.Besuretoalsopointtowardsother infrared receiverwindowoftheSR7001orother buttons whilepointingthetransmittertowards This transmitteremitsinfraredlight.Pressthe Note: amplifi This buttonisusedtoadjustthe volumeforthe m button. The currentpageisshownontheLCD. This buttonisusedtoswitchpagesfortheDirect n pages canbeswitched,so4 television, amplifi er, andother AV equipment. The for eachofthe12sourcebuttonssuchasDVD, Five typesofdirectoperationscanbeperformed b the LCD. The Setupmenuhasfourpages,andthe the Setupmode,wheremenuisshownon the 20 programs(4pages)canbemade.Holdingdown The mode. button switchesbetweenNormalmodeandMacro This buttonisusedtoprogramMacros.Pressingthis v of thesystem. a DVDplayer)onoroff independentlyfromtherest This buttonisusedtoturnaspecifi c off. These buttonsareusedtoturntheSR7001onor (When AMPmodeisselected) z > button isusedtomovethenextpage.Pressing buttonfrompage4returnsyouto1. POWER ONandOFFbuttons VOL (Volume) button >(Page) button D1toD5(Direct)buttons M(Mode)button Infrared Transmitter andLearning SOURCEON/OFFbutton • Set the AMP modetousethisbuttonwith the M > SR7001. buttonforthreesecondsormoreswitchesto buttonisusedtomovethenextpage.Up er andtelevision. Sensor c source(suchas × 5types=20 >

A sequence. Speaker modeisswitched in thefollowing (6) SPK-ABbutton Note: use withtheoutputsignalof“REC OUT”. The inputlevelisreduced. Attenuator isinvalidfor this functionisactivated. control, turnonthisfunction.“ATT” isindicatedwhen distorts evenbythrottlingtheSR7001VOLUME When theinputsignalistoohighandvoice (5) ATT button channel decoder. Press thisbuttontoselecttheoutputofanexternalmulti (4) 7.1CHbutton Used toselectthesurroundmode. (3) SURR(surround) button speaker levelsor7.1chinputlevel. Used tocallupSETUP MAINMENUandadjust (2) CHSEL. (channel select)button Used toenterthetesttonemenu. button (1) TEST (when AMPmodeisselected) operations. the amplifier, thesebuttonsareusedtoperform of thesourcecomponents.Ifissetto These buttonsareusedtoswitchbetween09 ⁄ menu. This buttonisusedtocancelsettingsinthesetup (whenAMPmodeisselected) ⁄ This buttonisusedtoselecttheLIP.SYNC mode. (when AMPmodeisselected) AV equipment. player, DSS(satellitebroadcastingtuner),orother This buttonisusedtodisplaythemenusforDVD . Note: and television. This buttonisusedtomutetheaudioforSR7001 , Numeric buttons EXIT button 1 0 GUIDE button MUTE button • This functionisunavailableduringthedigitalinput • • Set the AMP modetousethisbuttonwiththe → is selected. SR7001. B → A+B → off 9 ENGLISH NAME indicator NAME indicator LEARN I in control is remote when the is displayed This mode. renaming J control is in when the remote This is displayed learning mode. ve A B C D 4 123 PAGE USE NAME LEARN MACRO J I H G F E indicator Battery Level indicator TIMER indicator MACRO Name indicator Source Direct Button Name indicator indicator Page indicator Transmission indicator USE LCD INDICATORS F This is displayed when the battery level is low. G This is displayed when the macro timer is set. H This is displayed when the remote control is in macro programming mode. A such This displays the name of the selected source, equipment (up to ﬁ AV as DVD, television, or other B each This displays up to 20 types of button names for source. (up to six characters) C This displays the current page position. D a This lights up when the remote control is sending signal. E This is displayed under normal operation. Information about currently selected source and source and selected currently about Information the LCD. names are displayed on direct code characters). • This button is unavailable for SR7001. 1 8 9 0 7 LCD button PREV (Previous) button CH (Channel) buttons CURSOR MENU button MENU These buttons are used when controlling the cursor These buttons are used equipment. AV other of the SR7001, DVD, or ¤ and modes are shown Information about the sources on the LCD. ⁄ previous channel is used to return to the This button or other device. on the television Note: ⁄ channels. This is used to change ¤ ⁄ is selected) AMP mode (when MAIN up the SETUP to call is used This button SR7001. MENU of the er source, press controll with the SR7001. • not work with the SR7001. The MD button does • Select the AMP as the source to use this remote as the source to use this remote AMP Select the • • This button is unavailable for the SR7001. 6 5 4 3 2 CLEAR button CLEAR LIGHT 1 and 2 buttons SOURCE button SOURCE CONTROL button CONTROL MEMO button MEMO (7) DISP. button (7) DISP. of the the front display mode for the display Selects SR7001. (8) OSD button current setting are is pressed, the When this button TV monitor. the displayed on (sleep timer) button (9) SLEEP It can sleep timer. is used for setting the This button button in unit. the same way as the be operated (0) THX button THX mode. the Use this button to select This button is used to erase the memory or program This button is used to erase the memory or program of a source. ⁄ ⁄ and its Pressing these buttons will light up the LCD This lighting time can be set. If the lighting buttons. on only time is set to 0 seconds, the backlight turns The operations for while this button is pressed. 1 and 2 are identical. LIGHT ⁄ of your Thses buttons are used to switch the source button is Each time a source A/V Receiver / amplifer. source pressed, the remote control changes to the which was pressed. This remote control can control 12 types of equipment. A/V Receiver / ampliﬁ change the To The signal is this button twice within two seconds. sent when it is pressed the second time. Note: ⁄ when operating the PLAY, Thses buttons are used of a source. and other commands PAUSE, STOP, Note: ⁄ store settings to memory or This button is used to program a source.

ENGLISH 10 getting weak. replace batteriesearlierwhenyounoticethattheyare is about4monthswithnormaluse. Also besureto The lifeofthebatteriesusedwithremotecontrol Remote controlunit(RC8001SR) Remote-controllable range may notbepossible. an obstaclebetweenthem,useoftheremotecontrol a directionotherthantheIRSENSORorifthereis less than5meters.Iftheremotecontrolispointedin control andtheIRSENSORofSR7001shouldbe The distancebetweenthetransmitterofremote 2. 1.

REMOTE CONTROL RANGE LOADING BATTERIES

Learn

g Re g

RC1 m TA

400 Co

ntr

l IGHT er

A R

Insertthenewbatteries(AAA type)withcorrect Remove thebackcover. U

CD-

LEA

S 0 P

8 H

M 4 O

S 5 T

1 A

9 T

PR P

-A

3 D

I T and

MUTE Approx. 5 m

1 C

P /

W F

O N polarity.

60¡

E S

R T

O B

F Y

LEC

P R

O N

D S

I L

T T

O I

S A

U U

R T

R O

T D

S D

6 P

K 1

B T

G E

H A

T K

A A

N A G

A C

L P

D S L

U I

L R

C F IT

R E S

N R

O T

A W

U V

X O

L 1

N M

D P

E U

O T

R P SR7001 Whendisposingofusedbatteries,pleasecomply ¥ Ifthebatteriesshouldleak,carefullywipeoff the ¥ Removethebatterieswhennotplanningtouse ¥ To preventdamageorbatteryfl ¥ Wheninsertingthebatteries,becarefultodosoin ¥ Theincludedbatteryisonlyforverifyingoperation. ¥ Iftheremotecontrolunitdoesnotoperatefrom ¥ We recommendthatyouusealkalibatteries. ¥ Use“AAA”typebatteriesinthisremotecontrol ¥ CAUTIONS ONBATTERIES 3. Donotshort-circuit,disassemble,heator - Donotusetwodifferent typesofbatteries. - Donotuseanewbatterywithanoldone. - or area. public instruction’s rulesthatapplyinyourcountry with governmentalregulationsorenvironmental then insertnewbatteries. fl the remotecontrolunitforalongperiodoftime. the remotecontrolunit’s batterycompartment. the properdirection,following+and-marksin possible. Replace itwithanewbatteryassoon new ones,eveniflessthenayearhaspassed. close tothemainunit,replacebatterieswith unit. uid fromtheinsideofbatterycompartment, Closethecoveruntilitclicks. dispose ofbatteriesinfl ames. uid leakage: uid to preventfl Be suretoalwaysobservethefollowingprecautions Safety Precautionsfor Batteries Reset theclockafterreplacingbatteries. Thisremotecontrolusesnon-volatilememoryso ¥ will beunabletotransmitsignalsorlearncodes. fl as soonpossible. The LCDeventually startsto mark isdisplayed,thebatteriesshouldbereplaced the remotecontrolcanstillbeusedwhenbattery out, abatterymarkisdisplayedontheLCD. Although approximately fourmonths.Whenthebatterieswear Under normalusage,alkalinebatterieslast Ifanyofthebatteriesareleaking,completelywipe ¥ Iftheremote controlisnotoperatingproperly, ¥ Donotusedifferent typesofbatteriesormixold ¥ Donotusetheremotecontrolwitholdbatteriesor ¥ ¥ Donotusethebatteriesinremotecontrolwith ¥ Ifthebatteriesareleftunusedforalongperiod ¥ accidental ingestion,andotheraccidents. ash whenbuttonsarepressed,theremotecontrol BATTERY REPLACEMENTINTERVAL the batteries.Donotputbatteriesinafi Do notattempttorecharge,heat,ordisassemble retained evenifthebatteriesareremoved. that thelearnedcodesandmacroprogramsare batteries withnewones. up allleakedbatteryfl replace thebatterieswithnewones. and newbatteriesintheremotecontrol. worn-out batteriesinserted. the plusandminuspolarityreversed. may corrode. of time,thebatteryfl uid leakage,overheating,fi uid mayleakorthebatteries uid, andthenreplacethe re, breakage, re, re. setting is notbackedup.) shows 00:00.Please resettheclock.(Thetime Whenever thebatteries arereplaced,theclock Theclockstarts from0secondatthetime thatwas Thehourindicatorblinks. Theminuteindicatordisplays“20”. Theminuteindicatorblinks“_”. Thehourindicatordisplays“18”. The Thisdisplayssecondpage(SETUP). “ Themenuisdisplayed. Example: Settingto6:20PM(18:20) Starts fromstep4tosetthetime. 3 areskipped. batteries totheremotecontrolatfi When youboughtthisremotecontrolandinsertthe 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. SETTING THETIME TUNER TAPE CLEAR Press the Press the Press the Press the Press the Hold down the TV CH MENU 7.1CH PREV TEST DISP OFF 7 4 1 1 12 more. minute indicator. hour indicator. set andreturntonormal (USE)mode. displays “0:00”. Learning RemoteController AUX1 DVD CD POWER SOURCE LIP.SYNC ON/OFF RC8001SR CH.SEL LIGHT GUIDE OK THX OSD ATT 0 8 5 2 AUX2 CD-R VCR MUTE SPK-AB MEMO SLEEP SURR VOL EXIT ON 9 6 3 DSS AMP MD D5 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 ” indicator blinks and the clock indicator M OK D4 > 5. 4. 6. 2. 3 1. 2 1 buttononce. and and . (CLOCK)directbutton. cursorbuttontostarttheclock. M buttonforthreesecondsor 0 8 5 6 3 4 1 2 numericbuttontosetthe numericbuttontosetthe LEARN LEARN USE PAGE 1 rst, thesteps1to LEARN USE USE PAGE PAGE 12 12 11 ENGLISH Confi rms the setting in SETUP MENU mode MENU setting in SETUP rms the Confi input setup SOURCE ON/OFFSOURCE ONPOWER on and off the SR7001 Turns OFFPOWER D1 - D5 / >(Page) the SR7001 on Turns +/-VOL (Refer to page vi) the SR7001 off Turns MUTECursorOK Adjust the over all sound level MENU the sound temporarily Decreases EXIT MENU mode for setting in SETUP Move the cursor (1)TEST (2) CH.SEL MENU Enter the SETUP MENU Enter the SETUP SURR (3)7.1CH (4) Enter tone menu the test MENU from SETUP Exits and adjusts speaker levels or 7.1ch MENU SETUP Call up (5)ATT SPK-AB (6) Selects surround mode the (7)DISP Selects the 7.1CH IN OSD (8) (9)SLEEP Selects speaker system the Reduces the input level THX (0)Function selector Changes the front display mode GUIDE / LIP.SYNC Displays the current setting on the monitor Sets the sleep timer function Selects a particular source component mode Selects the LIP.SYNC THX mode Selects the D1 - D5 / >(Page)CH +/- vi) (Refer to page GUIDE0–9MEMOCLEAR Selects a preset station up and down TUNER direct input” Selects the “Frequency Input the numeric numbers Enter the tuner preset memory Clears the inputting band Selects a frequency M D1 D1 D2 D2 D3 D4 D3 D5 D4 D5 D5D5 MDMD AMPAMP DSSDSS 33 66 99 ONON EXITEXIT VOLVOL SURRSURR SLEEPSLEEP M MEMO SPK-ABSPK-AB MUTEMUTE D1 D1 D2 D2 D3 D4 D3 D5 D4 D5 D5 D5 MD AMP DSS 33 66 99 ON EXIT VOL SURRSURR SLEEPSLEEP MEMOMEMO SPK-ABSPK-AB MUTE 4 VCRVCR CD-RCD-R AUX2AUX2 VCR CD-R 22 55 88 0 AUX2 THX ATTATT OSDOSD OKOK 123 GUIDE LIGHT CH.SELCH.SEL RC8001SR ON/OFFON/OFF LIP.SYNC SOURCESOURCE POWERPOWER 22 55 88 00 PAGE ATTATT OSDOSD THX OK 1 GUIDEGUIDE LIGHT CDCD CH.SELCH.SEL RC8001SR ON/OFF DVDDVD AUX1AUX1 LIP.SYNC Learning Remote Controller SOURCE POWER PAGE CD USE DVD AUX1 Learning Remote Controller 12 11 44 77 OFFOFF USE DISPDISP TESTTEST PREV MENU 7.1CH7.1CH MENU CH TVTV CLEAR TAPETAPE 12 TUNERTUNER 11 44 77 OFF DISPDISP TESTTEST PREV 7.1CH7.1CH MENU CHCH TV CLEARCLEAR TAPE TUNERTUNER TUNER MODE AMP MODE AMP button for three button > the time may become out of sync over the course of become out of sync over the time may from time to sure to correct the clock operation. Be time. • Although the remote control uses a quartz clock, control uses a quartz clock, Although the remote • GENERAL INFORMATION OF RC8001SR TO OF RC8001SR TO INFORMATION GENERAL SR7001 ve seconds. seconds or more. The current time is displayed for for time is displayed The current or more. seconds fi Note: To control the SR7001 by your RC8001SR, you have control the SR7001 by your RC8001SR, To the TUNER by pressing or AMP to select the device Please refer below for the function selector button. TUNER mode. and AMP details in CHECKING THE TIME CHECKING the hold down the time, check To

ENGLISH 12 Right Surround Back Left Surround Back backward fromthe line. L/R speakers.Or placethecenterspeakeralittle Align thefrontlineofcenterspeaker withthefront Center speaker with 45-60degreesfromthelistening position. We recommend tosetthefrontL andRspeakers Front leftandrightspeakers setting oftheswitchesinmenusystem. may beusedinplaceofasubwooferwithproper you havefullrangefrontspeakers,however, they as itisoptimizedforlowfrequencyreproduction.If For optimalenjoymentasubwoofershouldbeused Bass effects areanimportantpartofhometheater. systems. were frequencylimitedinearlier“ProLogic”type surround channelsarediscretefullrange,whilethey the beneﬁ ts ofbothDolbyDigitalandDTSisthat of DolbyDigitalSurroundEXorDTS-ES.One The surroundcenterspeakerisusefulforplayback should beofhighquality. be identicaltothefrontchannelspeakers,butthey main speakers.Surroundchannelspeakersneednot It shouldpossesssimilarsoniccharacteristicstothe emanates fromthecenterchannel. over 80%ofthedialogfromatypicalmotionpicture Your centerchannelspeakerisveryimportantas sound stageastheactionmovesfromsidetoside. units. This willdeliversmoothpansacrossthefront be ofthesametype,withidenticalorsimilardriver For bestresultswerecommendthatallfrontspeakers subwoofer. a surroundbackleftandrightspeakers, a centerspeaker, surroundleftandrightspeakers, speaker systems,usingfrontleftandrightspeakers, The idealsurroundspeakersystemforthisunitis7- CONNECTIONS SPEAKER PLACEMENT 150 ° Surround Left Surround Right 135 110 ° ° 90 ° Subwoofer Front Center 30 ° Front Right Front Left 22 0 ° ° Note: as possible. Also placethespeakersatsameheight,asbest speakers higherthanyourearsbyabout70cmÐ1m. Place thesurroundleft,rightandback back speaker Surround leftandrightspeakers, andsurround possible. three frontspeakersatthesameheight,asbest Align thetweetersandmid-rangedriverson Front leftandrightspeakers, andacenterspeaker HEIGHT OFTHESPEAKERUNITS so youcanplaceitanywhereintheroom. bass effect. Sub-wooferbearsonlylowfrequencyrange We recommendusingasub-woofertohavemaximum Subwoofer room. The centerofthespeakershouldfaceinto listening position. Speakers shouldbeplacedonarearwall,behindthe channel systemisinstalled. Surround backspeakersarerequiredwhenafull7.1- Surround back leftandrightspeakers room. The centerofthespeakershouldfaceinto listening position. the sidewallsofroom,atorslightlybehind the preferredlocationforsurroundspeakersison When theSR7001isusedinsurroundoperation, Surround leftandrightspeakers • Usemagnetically-shielded speakers forfrontleft, installed nearthe TV andthe TV isamonitortype. right andthecenterspeakerswhen speakersare 1m 70cm

CONNECTING SPEAKERWIRE 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. CONNECTING SPEAKERS subwoofer Tighten theknobbyturningitclockwise to Insertthebarepartofwireintoholein Twist thebaredwireendstight,topreventshort Stripawayapprox.3/8inch(10mm)ofwire Passive Loosen theknobbyturningitcounterclockwise. secure thewire. side ofeachterminal. circuits. insulation. VIDEO TV FM TV ( 75 ( 1 R 1 4 Ω L ) ) OUTPUT INVERT DVD Ampliﬁ N AM GND SPEAKER SYSTEM ( MINIMUM 4OHMS 2 2 5 ) INPUT IN DVD Power I MAX MIN LEVEL INPUT VCR1 3 ATRSLAVE MASTER ( 3 T REMOTECONT. BTL IN ) VCR1 EXT. CONT.IN +5~13V DC VIDEO/ OUT INPUT 2 OUT DSS/VCR2

YTMOTOUT SYSTEM OUT S

ANTENNA E DIGITAL OUT ( DVD 6 DSS/VCR2 IN IN er ( 4 ) ) DIGITAL IN OUT IN COMPONENT INPUT 1 VIDEO OPT. COAX. IN MULTI OUT AECD/CDR TAPE INPUT 3 ( TV OUT IN ) OUT C5MULTIRC RC-5 OUT ( VCR1 ) IN MONITOR OUT OUT YY AUDIO INPUT 4 MULTI OUT ( DSS/VCR2 C B / P B INPUT 3 INPUT 1 ) DC OUT R L Y ( C ( VCR1 TV R / ) P R ) SR SL UPT1OUTPUT2 OUTPUT 1 2 1 INPUT 2 FLASHER DVD INPUT 4 IN ( 2 ) ( DVD RECEIVER ( DSS/VCR2 TV ) IN IR ( 1 ) C subwoofer B NOUT IN AB / P ) B Powered SBR SBR SBL SBL 2 1 EMITTER OUT C VCR1 R / P RSR L SW ( C C R 3 ) ( AUX2 SL DSS/VCR2 NOUT IN ) ( 4 ) C Ver1.2 HDMI B MONI. OUT / P B C R / P S-VIDEO R RS-232C OUT OUT PUT PUT 2 1 SWS W 7.1CH OUTO PREP IN R U E T .4 5. 4. 3. .2. 1. MODEL NO.SR8001 (10 mm) 3/8 inch Right AC IN Surround BACK 230V 50/60Hz AC OUTLET 0.65A 150W SWITCHED SUB SPEAKER MULTI SPEAKER /SPEAKER C Left SURROUNDS U R R BACKB O A U C R R N L L K D OFF ON ih Left Right FRONT A+BF SURR BACKS FRONT AORB.CENTER.SURR.F R R U O O R Surround N N R T T B

A A A Right

C O + SYSTEMSS K SPEAKERS

R B Y P

B S E T A . C E K M E E R R R L L L R S N T FRONT A : : MINIMUM6OHMS E

M R MINIMUM 8OHMSM I . I N S N U I I M M R U U R M M .

6 8

O O H FRONTF FRONTF H SURR.S R R M U M O O R S N N S TERT CENC B A R E T T E . R N Left Right FRONT B Center Left 13 ENGLISH external RF demodulator Dolby Digital decoder external RF demodulator Dolby Digital decoder when connecting the Dolby Digital RF output jack of the videodisc player to the digital input jack. standard. If you use a cable that does to the EIA not conform to this standard, the SR7001 may not function properly. Signals input through the digital and analog jacks are output through the corresponding digital and analog jacks, respectively. • There is no Dolby Digital RF input jack. Use an Dolby Digital RF input jack. Use an There is no • on the SR7001 conform The digital signal jacks • Each type of audio jack works independently. •

Notes:

R L Analog Audio (coaxial) Digital Audio (optical) Digital Audio 2 Tape Deck Tape IN 7.1CH 1 2 PUT PUT OUT OUT RS-23 R S-VIDEO P / R C B P / MONI. OUT B HDMI Ver1.2 C ) 4 ( PRE OUT ) IN OUT DSS/VCR2 L R SL AUX2 ( ) 3 R C C ( R R SW SW L RSR P / R VCR1 C OUT EMITTER L L SBL SBL SBR SBR B ) P / AB IN OUT B OUT IN L C ) 1 ( L R R R IR IN ) TV DSS/VCR2 ( RECEIVER R DVD ( ) L 2 L T ( U IN INPUT 4 OUTO DVD 1 2 FLASHER INPUT 2 1 2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 R L D C SL SR / ) R D CD/CDRC P ) / N INI R TV R VCR1 ( C ( Y L R DC OUT ) INPUT 1 INPUT 3 3 optical jacks, on the rear panel. You can use can use You 3 optical jacks, on the rear panel. DTS these jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and bitstream signals from a CD, DVD, or other digital source components. These jacks optical output jack on the rear panel. deck can be connected to a CD recorder-, or a MD inputs, respectively. or setup the digital audio format of DVD player, connected to digital input other digital source’s jacks. (for input jacks. Use 75 ohms coaxial cables digital audio or video) for DIG-4, 5, 6 input jacks. output jacks according to your component. See page 24. B P / T B U OUTO C DSS/VCR2 ( E O MULTI OUT I P CONNECTING DIGITAL AUDIO COMPONENTS CONNECTING DIGITAL ¥ There are 6 digital inputs, 3 coaxial jacks and ¥ There is one digital output coaxial jack and one ¥ To Refer to the instructions for each component. ber optical cables (optical) for DIG-1,2,3 ¥ ﬁ Use ¥ can designate the input for each digital input/ You A D TAPET U INPUT 4 AUDIOA YY N INI OUT MONITOR ) VCR1 ( OUT RC-5 MULTI RC ) IN OUT TV ( INPUT 3 OUT MULTI COAX. OPT. VIDEO INPUT 1 T COMPONENT U OUT O

L A ) ) 4 T ( I IN IN G DSS/VCR2 6 I DVD ( DIGITAL OUTDIGITAL OUTD ANTENNA DSS/VCR2 OUT INPUT 2 OUT VCR1 ) IN 3 ( 3 VCR1 DVD N I

IN ) 2 L 2 ( A T I GND AM G DVD I DIGITAL IND 55 ) ) L Ω 4 1 R 1 ( 75 ( TV FM TV VIDEO DIGITAL OUTPUT INPUT DIGITAL L R L R OUT IN L R R CD recorder / MD deck CD recorder L to mains power until all connections between to mains power until all connections between components have been completed. connections may make noise. properly. (left) channel. white connectors are for the L connected to this unit. power cords and speaker cables this will result in generating a hum or other noise. • Do not connect this unit and other components Do not connect this unit and other components • • Incomplete connectors securely. Insert all plugs and the left and right channels Be sure to connect • and Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, • Be sure to connect input and output properly. • Refer to the instructions for each component that is Do not bind audio/video connection cables with • CONNECTING AUDIO AUDIO CONNECTING COMPONENTS Caution: Notes: The output audio signal from the TAPE OUT jack and jack and OUT TAPE The output audio signal from the jack is the same signal the CD/CD RECORDER OUT which is currently selected. er er to as ed impedance er built in ). er. speaker terminal. Doing so may damage this unit. speaker terminal. Doing so speaker terminals speaker terminals is when the power on. It may cause you to receive an electric shocks. Be sure to connect the positive and negative cables for Be sure to connect the positive the If they are miss-connected, the speaker properly. and the signal quality will signal phase will be reversed be corrupted. Be sure to use speakers with the specifi to use speakers Be sure bare do not let the circuitry, prevent damage to To not let them touch each other and do speaker wires part touch any metal of this unit. shown on the rear panel of this unit. on the rear panel shown • • • cable to one Do not connect more than one speaker • Do not touch the not touch the Do • • If your subwoofer is a passive type (power amplifi is not built in), connect a monaural power amplifi SUBWOOFER jack and connect the the PRE OUT subwoofer to the amplifi CONNECTING A CONNECTING A SUBWOOFER to connect a SUBWOOFER jack Use the PRE OUT powered subwoofer (power amplifi Caution: Note:

ENGLISH 14 Notes: terminal, connecttheaudiosignalseparately. conversion cableorplug.WhenconnectingtoaDVI or monitorthathasaDVIterminalusinganHDMI-DVI principle. Therefore, itispossibletoconnecta TV HDMI videostreamingiscompatiblewithDVIin its HDMIjack. must supportmultichannelaudiotransmissionthrough multichannel audioviaHDMI,theconnectedplayer player, TV, projector orothercomponent. To transmit HDMI jackontheSR7001withaDVD An HDMIcable(soldseparately)isusedtoconnectthe CONNECTING HDMIDEVICES Notes: (See page24,35) Select aninputsourcefromtheOSDmenusystem. Video) forHDMIoutput. video signals(CompositeVideo, S-Video, Component The SR7001isalsocapableofconvertinganalog high qualityimagescanbeenjoyed. degradation causedbyanalogconversionsothat other sourcesdirectlytoadisplay. Itminimizessignal send digitalvideoandaudiosignalsfromDVDs output (TheSR8001hastwoHDMIoutputs.).Itcan This SR7001hasfourHDMIinputsandone HDMI JACK • SomesourcedevicessuchasDVD playersorset DVIcablescomewith24-pinand29-pin plugs. This • • Whenconnectedtoamonitor(i.e., TV, projector, SomeHDMI componentscanbecontrolledoverthe • Refertotheinstructionmanualof TV ordisplayto • • There maybenoimageoutputifconnectedtoa • WhentheHDMIoutputisconnectedtoadisplay * HDCP:High-bandwidthDigitalContentProtection projectors. not properlyprojected onmonitorssuchas TVs and like thoseoftheSR7001. Insuchcase,picturesare top boxdonotsupport HDMIrepeateroperations cables cannotconnecttoit. receiver supports24-pinDVI-Dcables; 29-pinDVI are notoutput. etc.) thatdoesnotsupportHDCP, videoandaudio components thisway. HDMI cable,butthisreceivercannotcontrolother regarding theHDMIterminal. be connectedtotheSR7001fordetailedinformation format. TV ordisplaythatisnotcompatiblewiththeabove connect toadisplaythatsupportsHDCP. output. To viewimagesinHDMI,itisnecessaryto monitor thatdoesnotsupportHDCP, signalsare not • Depending onthequialityofcableused, Multi channelPCMsignalsandaudioof62 • • If aDVDplayerorotherdevicewithDVIoutput • (*DSD:DirectStreamDigital) If anSuper Audio CDplayerthatdoesnotsupport • • IfaDVDplayerthatdoesnotsupportHDMI1.1 • Some DVD-Audiodisks disabledownmixing. Disconnecting orconnectingcableswiththepower • • When multiplecomponentsareconnectedtothis HDMI signalmaybeaffected bynoise. not outputfromtheDIGITAL OUT jacks. kHz orhigherthatareinputfromtheHDMIjack INPUT SETUP connected audioinputasexplainedin“ needed fortheaudiosignals.Inthiscase,select cable (optical-digital,coaxialdigitaloranalog)is is connectedtotheSR7001,aseparateaudio CD. playback isnotpossibleevenwithSuper Audio HDMI 1.2isconnectedtothereceiver, DSD disks. playback isnotpossibleevenwithDVD-Audio is connectedtotheSR7001,multichannelPCM right speakers,andsubwooferareconnected. unless theleft,center, rightandsurroundleft These typesofdisksarenotplayedbackcorrectly before disconnectingorconnectingcables. on candamagetheequipment. Turn thepoweroff prevent interferencebetweenthem. receiver, turnpowertounusedcomponentsoff to ”. (Seepage24) 1-1 FUNC SATELLITE TUNER HDMI OUTPUT VIDEO TV FM TV ( 75 ( 1 R 1 4 Ω L ) ) DVD N AM GND ( 2 2 5 ) IN DVD VCR1 3 ( 3 IN ) VCR1 OUT INPUT 2I N OUT P DSS/VCR2 U T

2 ANTENNA DIGITAL OUT ( DVD DSS/VCR2 IN IN ( 4 ) ) ( DVDD V DIGITAL IN OUT D COMPONENT INPUT 1 ) VIDEO OPT. COAX. IN MULTI OUT AECD/CDR TAPE INPUT 3 ( TV OUT IN ) OUT C5MULTIRC RC-5 ( VCR1 HDMI OUTPUT ) IN MONITOR OUT OUT YY AUDIO INPUT 4I N P U V lyrVIDEOPROJECTOR DVD player T MULTI OUT

4 ( DSS/VCR2 C B ( / DSS/VCR2D P S B INPUT 3 S INPUT 1 / V ) C DC OUT R R L 2 Y ( C ( VCR1 TV R / ) P ) R ) SR SL UPT1OUTPUT2 OUTPUT 1 O 2 1 INPUT 2 FLASHER U DVD T INPUT 4 IN P U ( 2 T )

( 1 DVD RECEIVER ( DSS/VCR2 TV ) IN IR ( 1 ) C B NOUT IN AB / P ) B SBR SBR SBL SBL 2 1 EMITTER OUT C VCR1 R / P RSR L SW SW ( C C R 3 ) ( AUX2 SL 6 DSS/VCR2 NOUT IN ) OUT PRE ( 4 ) C Ver1.2V Ver1.2 HDMIH HDMI B e MONI. OUT D / r P M 1 . B I 2 SURROUND OUT BACK C R / P S-VIDEO R RS-232C OUT OUT PUT PUT 2 1 7.1CH IN HDMI INPUT MODEL NO.SR8001 AC IN 230V 50/60Hz AC OUTLET 0.65A 150W SWITCHED SUB SPEAKER MULTI SPEAKER /SPEAKER C R R LL L OFF ON R R R L L RN :MINIMUM8OHMS FRONT A+B :MINIMUM6OHMS SURR BACK FRONT AORB.CENTER.SURR. SYSTEMS SPEAKER FRONT FRONT SURR. TER CEN B A 15 ENGLISH has the “TV-AUTO ON/OFF” function has the “TV-AUTO he SR7001 If you connect the S-VIDEO or component signal to If you connect the S-VIDEO or component signal is the S-VIDEO or component jack on the SR7001, it not necessary to connect the conventional video signal VIDEO (composite) jack. If you use both video to the inputs, the SR7001 gives priority to the S-VIDEO signal. T Be sure to connect the left and right audio channels Be sure to connect the left properly. Signals input to the VIDEO (composite) and S- Signals input to the VIDEO jacks or component are output to the (composite) and S-VIDEO VIDEO corresponding or component jacks, respectively. source or other digital format of your DVD player, components. Refer to the instructions of the each component connected to the digital input jacks. external RF demodulator Dolby Digital decoder when connecting the Dolby Digital RF output jack of the videodisc player to the digital input jack. of the SR7001 can output the same video signal. 2 terminal of the SR8001 the OUTPUT Moreover, can output video signals for multi room playback. (See page 34) white connectors are the for L (left) channel. white connectors are the for L video signals properly. to turn the TV ON or OFF automatically, by sensing ON or OFF automatically, TV to turn the VIDEO jacks. the incoming video signal from the • Each type of video jack works independently. works independently. Each type of video jack • • output may need to setup the digital audio You • Use an There is no Dolby Digital RF input jack. • 1 and 2 terminals OUTPUT The COMPONENT • • Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and Be sure to connect the inputs and outputs of the • • VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT JACKS COMPONENT S-VIDEO, VIDEO, rear panel. on the of video jacks are 3 types There jack VIDEO jacks is the signal for the VIDEO The video composite video signal. conventional S-VIDEO jack luminance (Y) and is separated into The video signal The S-VIDEO for the S-VIDEO jack. color (C) signals reproduction. If high-quality color signals enables has an S-VIDEO output, we your video component Connect the S-VIDEO output recommend to use it. to the S-VIDEO input jack on your video component jack on the SR7001. Component jack TV or connections to a Make component video inputs to produce higher monitor with component a component video cable quality video images. Use the component video out or 3 video cords to connect the monitor. jacks on the SR7001 to Notes:

R L IN 7.1CH 2 1 O PUT PUT OUT OUT E D I T RS-232 V U - R O

S-VIDEOS . P I / N R O C MONI. OUTM B )) P 44 / Video S-Video Analog Audio Digital Audio (coaxial) Digital Audio (optical) (( B SL HDMI Ver1.2 OUT C 2 R L RSR C PRE OUT V / ) S N S INI DSS/VCR2D AUX2 ( R C C IN OUT SW SW P / R C OUT EMITTER ) SBL SBL SBR SBR 3 ( B ) VCR1 P / AB B C 1 2 IR IN ) DSS/VCR2 ( IN RECEIVER DVD ( ) ) 2 ( OUT 1 ( IN INPUT 4 TV DVD 1 2 FLASHER INPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO SL SR ) R P ) / R TV VCR1 ( C ( Y L R DC OUT ) INPUT 1 INPUT 3 B P / B C DSS/VCR2 ( MULTI OUT R INPUT 4 AUDIO T O YY U T I OUT OUTO N IN O TV MONITORM VIDEO IN ) )) VIDEO 44 (( VCR1 ( OUT RC-5 MULTI RC OUT ) IN OUT 2 R TV 2 ( C INPUT 3 TAPE CD/CDR R V / C OUT MULTI IN S V / S S COAX. OPT. VIDEO DSS/VCR2D N N S INI INI INPUT 1 DSS/VCR2D COMPONENT Satellite Tuner Satellite R OUT L ) OUT 6 DVD ( VIDEO DIGITAL OUT ANTENNA L OUT R LR OUT AUDIO INPUT 2 OUT OUT VCR1 ) IN IN 3 ( 3 VCR1 DVD N I

) 5 2 L 2 ( A T I GND AM G DVD I L R DIGITAL IND ) Ω 1 )) 75 ( 11 (( V L R FM TVT LR V OUT O TVT E D AUDIO I LL 44 RR VIDEOV OUT DIGITAL VIDEO VIDEO L L R R PROJECTOR /SPEAKER C MULTI SPEAKER SUB SPEAKER SWITCHED 0.65A 150W AC OUTLET 230V 50/60Hz IN AC IN VCR S-VIDEO MODEL NO. SR8001 R P

R IN C 7.1CH B P

T T 11 B U 2 U O PUTP PUT OUTO OUT E D I T RS-232C V U - RR O

VIDEO IN S-VIDEOS . PP I // N YC RR O CC MONI. OUTM BACK COMPONENT SURROUND BB PP // BB HDMI Ver1.2 CC SL C C SW SW PRE OUT ) YY L RSR IN OUT SBL SBL SBR SBR AUX2 ( S-VIDEO OUT IN R P / T R )) U OUTO 33 C OUT (( EMITTER 1 2 1 R SL SR B C ) VCR1V P / AB N INI B C IR IN ) 1 2 DSS/VCR2 ( )) RECEIVER ) 22 DVD 4 ( ( (( OUT Y D IN V INPUT 4 DVDD FLASHER INPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 S-VIDEO DSS/VCR2 R P ) / )) R TV ( C L R 1 DC OUT R ) R C IN VCR1V INPUT 1 (( P B VIDEO

OUT IN P /

/ B R C 3 DSS/VCR2

( C T IN OUT U O MULTI OUT I P ) B 1 D N ( INPUT 3I U P

TV INPUT 4 AUDIOA /

Y B OUT OUT MONITOR OUT MULTI ) IN IN YC VCR1 ( VIDEO OUT OUT RC-5 MULTI RC T OUT ) ) O N COMPONENT 4 ( E E TV ( INPUT 3 D TAPE CD/CDR N I O VIDEOV IN R P OPT. COAX. M INPUT 1 DSS/VCR2 O COMPONENTC IN L OUT DIGITAL IN L LR ) AUDIO DSS/VCR2 6 T T DVD )) U U ( R DIGITAL OUT ANTENNA OUTO OUTO 33 (( 1 R 1 INPUT 2 C R VCR1V C VCR1V N N INI INI R R ) 3 1 ( TV )) 22 L L (( OUT LR 5 D V D DVDD AUDIO V GND AM DVDD TV 22 ) Ω 4 1 R OUT 75 ( VIDEO FM L LL RR VIDEO R L OUT LR AUDIO OUT DIGITAL DVD player DVD CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS VIDEO CONNECTING

ENGLISH 16 MAIN MENU.Seepage24. and setthe7.1CHINPUT levelbyusingtheSETUP If youusethesejacks,switchonthe7.1CHINPUT player, DVDaudioplayerorexternaldecoder. source suchasaSuper Audio CDmultichannel The 7.1CHINPUT jacksareformultichannelaudio CONNECTING MULTI CHANNEL AUDIO SOURCE ADVANCED CONNECTING R L RN SURR. FRONT Multi channel player DVD Audio player Super Audio CD RL R L RL or SURR. BACK RL WOOFER CENTER SUB T N U E U M U 4 O C OUT T T 3 ULTI ( B T 1 DSS/VCR2 / ( P VCR1 ( TV B OUT ) ) DC OUT ) C R / P CD/CDR INPUT 4 R 2 1 INPUT 2 FLASHER ( DVD DSS/VCR2 OUT IN ( 2 ) ( MULTI OUT DVD RECEIVER ) TV ) IN IR ( 1 ) C B NOUT IN AB IN / P B Y R EMITTER L OUT C VCR1 R / P UPT1OUTPUT2 OUTPUT 1 RSR L 2 1 ( R 3 R L ) ( AUX2 AUX2A SL U DSS/VCR2 R X L NOUT IN R R Y L L 2 ) OUT PRE ) ( 4 ) R L C Ver1.2 HDMI SRS SRS SL SLS SLS B MONI. OUT R R L L / SBR SBR SBL SBL P B R L SW SW C C C SBRS SBRS SBLS SBLS R L B B R B B R R L L / P S-VIDEO R RS-232C R L external poweramplifi Be suretoconnecteachspeakerthecorresponding power amplifi The PREOUT jacksareforconnectingexternal CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL POWER AMPLIFIER OUT OUT PUT PUT 2 1 SWS SWS W W C C 7.1CH7 . OUTO PREP 1 IN R U C INI N E T H MODEL N A ers. Subwoofer C Amplifer Power R er. R L Left Front RN SURR. FRONT L Left Surround Surround Back Left R L R Center L SURR. BACK Back Right Surround Surround WOOFER CENTER Right SUB Right Front this feature. units, (nottheSR7001)to“EXT.” (external)touse Set theREMOTECONTROL SWITCH ontheother switch issynchronizedwiththisunit’s powerswitch. one oftheseterminals,thepoweramplifi amplifi er (somemodelsexcluded)isconnectedto control onlyattheSR7001. Also, ifaMarantzpower this terminal. Therefore youneedtoaimtheremote the signalissenttoconnecteddevicethrough received bytheremotesensoronSR7001. Then The signaltransmittedfromtheremotecontrolis REMOTE CONTROL terminalsoneach unit. SR7001 withtheremotecontrolbyconnecting You cancontrolotherMarantzproductsthrough the q CONNECTING THEREMOTECONTROL JACKS OUT CONTROL REMOTE IN VIDEO TV FM TV ( 75 ( 1 R 1 4 Ω L ) ) DVD N AM GND ( 2 2 5 ) IN DVD VCR1 XENLINTERNAL EXTERNAL 3 ( CD recorder 3 IN ) VCR1 OUT INPUT 2 OUT DSS/VCR2 ANTENNA DIGITAL OUT ( DVD 6 DSS/VCR2 IN IN ( 4 ) ) DIGITAL IN OUT COMPONENT INPUT 1 VIDEO OPT. COAX. IN MULTI OUT AECD/CDR TAPE INPUT 3 ( TV OUT IN ) OUT C5MULTIRC RC-5 RC-5R OUT 1 C ( - VCR1 5 ) IN MONITOR OUT OUT YY AUDIO INPUT 4 MULTI OUT OUTO INI U N ( DSS/VCR2 T C B / P B INPUT 3 INPUT 1 ) DC OUT R L Y ( C ( VCR1 TV R OUT / ) P R ) SR SL IN UPT1OUTPUT2 OUTPUT 1 2 1 INPUT 2 FLASHER DVD INPUT 4 IN er’s, power er’s, ( 2 ) ( DVD RECEIVER ( DSS/VCR2 TV ) IN IR ( 1 ) C B NOUT IN AB / P ) B SBR SBR SBL SBL 2 1 EMITTER OUT C VCR1 R / P RSR L ( R 3 ) ( AUX2 SL CONTROL REMOTE DSS/VCR2 NOUT IN ) ( 4 ) XENLINTERNAL EXTERNAL C Ver1.2 HDMI B MONI. OU / P B DVD player C R

Note: main unitbyusingthefollowingprocedure. always disableoperationoftheinfraredsensoron are connectedtoRC-5INoftheSR7001,besure Whenever externalinfraredsensorsorsimilardevices w

/ P 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. S-VID R O P P O U U 2 T 1 U U S S To restoretheoriginalsetting, perform steps1 Press the Press the Thesetting“IR=ENABLE” isshownontheFL Holddownthe • Be suretoset“IR=ENABLE”whenexternal remote controlcommands. Otherwise, themainunitwillbeunable toreceive infrared sensorsorsimilardevicesare not connected. ﬁ button onthefrontpanelatsametimefor to 4set“IR=ENABLE”. disabled. made, theinfraredsensoron mainunitis DISPLAY. this to“IR=DISABLE”. ve seconds. ve 2 ENTER CURSOR OUT IN MULTI RC OUT button.Oncethissettingis buttons( buttonandthe XENLINTERNAL EXTERNAL CD player 1 OPTION , 2 ) tochange CONTROL REMOTE MENU

17 ENGLISH

Press and hold down the lever of the AM antenna Press and hold down the terminal. grounding is necessary. signs, busy roads, etc.). well away from power lines, transformers, etc. grounding is necessary. AM antenna GND terminal. • AM loop antenna. Do not remove the avoid the risk of lightning and electrical shock, • To • Keep the antenna away from noise sources (neon • Keep the antenna away from noise sources (neon • Do not put the antenna close to power lines. Keep it avoid the risk of lightning and electrical shock, • To • Connect the shielded grounding wire (black) to the Insert the bare wire into the antenna terminal. Release the lever. 2. 3. 1. An outdoor antenna will be more effective if it is if it is An outdoor antenna will be more effective stretched horizontally above a window or outside. Notes: If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor an reception quality, If you experience poor quality. antenna may improve the ANTENNA AN FM OUTDOOR CONNECTING Notes: CONNECTING AN AM OUTDOOR ANTENNA CONNECTING THE SUPPLIED ANTENNAS SUPPLIED THE CONNECTING antenna supplied FM the Connecting only. for indoor use antenna is FM The supplied move it in various extend the antenna and During use, is received. the clearest signal directions until implements in push pins or similar Fix it with least amount of that will cause the the position distortion. an outdoor poor reception quality, If you experience the quality. antenna may improve AM loop antenna Connecting the supplied is for indoor use AM loop antenna The supplied only. and position it to where you Set it in the direction Put it as far away as receive the clearest sound. televisions, speaker cables, possible from the unit, and power cords. Note: A B CEN TER SURR. FRONT FRONT SPEAKER SYSTEMS FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR. SURR BACK : MINIMUM 6 OHMS FRONT A + B : MINIMUM 8 OHMS L L R R R ON OFF Antenna LL L R R AM External /SPEAKER C MULTI SPEAKER SUB SPEAKER SWITCHED 0.65A 150W AC OUTLET 230V 50/60Hz AC IN MODEL NO. SR8001 IN 7.1CH 1 2 PUT PUT OUT OUT Antenna AM Loop RS-232C R S-VIDEO P / R surface. Place the antenna on stable C BACK OUT SURROUND B P / 4. MONI. OUT B

HDMI Ver1.2 C N ) 4 ( N PRE OUT ) E IN OUT DSS/VCR2 T 6 SL AUX2 ( N ) 3 R C C ( SW SW L ANTA RSR P / R VCR1 C OUT EMITTER 1 2 SBL SBL SBR SBR B ) P / AB IN OUT B C ) 1 M ( IR IN ) TV AMA DSS/VCR2 ( RECEIVER DVD ( ) 2 ( IN INPUT 4 DVD FLASHER INPUT 2 1 2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 SL SR ) R P ) / R TV VCR1 ( D C ( Y L R DC OUT N ) INPUT 1 GNDG INPUT 3 B P / B C DSS/VCR2 ( MULTI OUT )) INPUT 4 AUDIO YY OUT OUT MONITOR ΩΩ IN ) 5 5 VCR1 ( 7 Antenna RC-5 MULTI RC OUT ( ) IN OUT TV ( INPUT 3 TAPE CD/CDR FM External OUT MULTI IN

COAX. OPT. VIDEO

INPUT 1 COMPONENT M A OUT DIGITAL IN N F N ) ) 4 E ( IN IN T DSS/VCR2 DVD N ( DIGITAL OUT ANTENNAA ANTENNA DSS/VCR2 OUT INPUT 2 OUT M AMA VCR1 ) IN 3 ( 3 D VCR1 N GNDG DVD IN ) 5 2 2 )) ( GND AM ΩΩ DVD 5 ) 757 ) L (( Ω 4 1 R 1 ( 75 (

M FM FM F TV VIDEO into the slot at the base part. Release the vinyl tie and take out the connection Release the vinyl tie and take out the connection line. Insert the hook at the bottom of the loop part reverse direction. Bend the base part in the

FM Antenna CONNECTING THE ANTENNA TERMINALS ANTENNA THE CONNECTING 3. 2. 1.

ASSEMBLING THE AM LOOP ANTENNA AM LOOP ASSEMBLING THE

ENGLISH 18 CONNECTING FORTHEMULTI ROOM VIDEOV I D E O FM TV ( 75 ( 1 R 1 4 Ω L ) ) TV DVD N AM GND ( 2 2 5 ) DVD VCR1 3 IN ( 3 NIN IN ) VCR1 MULTIROOM B OUT INPUT 2 OUT DSS/VCR2 ANTENNA DIGITAL OUT ( DVD DSS/VCR2 IN ( 4 ) ) DIGITAL IN OUT COMPONENT INPUT 1 VIDEO OPT. COAX. IN AECD/CDR TAPE INPUT 3 ( TV ) OUT RC-5 ( VCR1 ) IN MULTI RCM U MONITOR L OUT T OUT I

R YY C AUDIOA INPUT 4 U D I O OUTO INI U N ( MULTIM DSS/VCR2 T C OUTO U U L B T T / I P B INPUT 3 INPUT 1 ) DC OUT R L Y ( C ( VCR1 TV R / ) P R ) SR SL UPT1OUTPUT2 OUTPUT 1 2 1 INPUT 2 FLASHER L DVD INPUT 4 IN ( 2 ) ( DVD R RECEIVER ( DSS/VCR2 TV ) IN IR ( 1 ) C B NOUT IN MULTI OUTM A / U P ) L B T I

O U SBR SBR SBL SBL T 2 1 EMITTER OUT C VCR1 R B / P RSR L SW SW ( C C R 3 ) ( AUX2 SL 6 DSS/VCR2 NOUT IN ) OUT PRE ( 4 ) C Ver1.2 HDMI B MONI. OUT / P B SURROUND OUT BACK C R FRONT R R / P S-VIDEO S R M RS-232C U U L L B OUT OUT PUT PUT L 2 1

T S I P

/ S S E P 7.1CH P A R E IN L E K A A E K K R E E R EAKER R AKER KER C

C MODEL NO.SR8001 AC IN OFFO ONO F N F 230V 50/60Hz AC OUTLET 0.65A 150W SWITCHED SUB SPEAKERS MULTI SPEAKERM U U B L

T S I P

/SPEAKER C/ S S E P P A E E K A A E K K R E E R R

C R R LL L OFF ON R R R L L RN :MINIMUM8OHMS FRONT A+B :MINIMUM6OHMS SURR BACK FRONT AORB.CENTER.SURR. RC OUT SYSTEMS SPEAKER FRONT FRONT SURR. TER CEN B A IR RECEIVER RC IN FRONT R L R L VIDEO IN MULTIROOM SPEAKER (For multiroom) SPEAKER RIGHT MAIN AMP LEFT (Multi room speaker) MONITOR MULTIROOM SPEAKER RIGHT SPEAKER LEFT Note: Notes: rear paneltoON. fi sound quality. Connectthespeakersasshownin with separatechannelamps,whichenablesbetter This allowsyoutodrivethetrebleandbassunits have twosetsofinputs(fortrebleandbass). A bi-wireconnectionispossiblewithspeakersthat Bi-wire Connection CONNECTING FORSPEAKERCUSE gure. SettheSPEAKERCselectorswitchon O • You canusesurroundbackspeakerterminals as Ifthespeakerisfi • Turn powertothereceiveroff beforechangingthe • If incorrectlyconnected, aprotectivecircuitinthe • DEL NO.SR8001 when youarenotusing surroundbackspeakers. MULTI SPK.terminalsorSPEAKERCterminal shorting bar. setting oftheSPEAKERCselectorswitch. the receiver. recheck theconnectionsbetweenspeakersand (The STANDBY indicatorwillfl receiver willtripandsetthetostandby. AC IN SPEAKER RIGHT S M U U B L

T S I P

/ S 230V 50/60Hz S E AC OUTLET 0.65A 150W SWITCHED P SUB SPEAKER SUB SPEAKERS P A MULTI SPEAKER MULTI SPEAKERM E U E U B K A L

A /SPEAKER C T S E K I P

K /SPEAKER C/ S S E R E P P E A E E R K A A EAKER R SURROUNDS E K AKER U K KER C R E R

E R C R R BACKB O

A C U C R R R N L LL L K D tted withashortingbar, removethe SURROUND BACK OFF ON R R R L L OFFO ONO RN :MINIMUM8OHMS FRONT A+B :MINIMUM6OHMS SURR BACK FRONT AORB.CENTER.SURR. F N F SYSTEMSS SYSTEMS SPEAKERS SPEAKER Y P S E T A E K M E R L R S ash.) Insuchcase, SPEAKER FRONT FRONT FRONTF SURR. R TER CEN O B A N A T LEFT 19 ENGLISH Signal ON OFF L L R R BACK SURROUND /SPEAKER C MULTI SPEAKER SUB SPEAKER SWITCHED 0.65A 150W AC OUTLET GND 230V 50/60Hz AC IN cations of those devices. MODEL NO. SR8001 +12V C an IR receiver of the wrong voltage can damage the an IR receiver of the wrong voltage can damage the SR7001, therefore do not do this. to the IR RECEIVER IN terminal. of current to this receiver will damage this receiver. Before using other devices, carefully check the speciﬁ 2 3 2 - a • Wrongly connecting an IR receiver or connecting • Wrongly • are supplied to the device connected of current 50 mA • Connecting a device that requires more than 50 mA S R IR RECEIVER IN (SR8001 Only) L R IN PRE OUT An IR receiver is connected as shown above. Caution: g control This receiver can be operated by remote connecting by without using the internal IR receiver, an external IR receiver. 7.1CH MULTI OUT 1 2 PUT PUT OUT OUT RS-232C OUT R S-VIDEO P / R C B OUT P / MONI. OUT B SL HDMI Ver1.2 C TAPE CD/CDR ) IN 4 ( L RSR ) OUT IN OUT DSS/VCR2 AUX2 ( ) 3 R C C ( SW SW R P T / E U T R O T VCR1

I OUT C M d EMITTERE 22 11 SBL SBL SBR SBR SL SR B R ) P E / R N AB V IRI INI IN OUT I B E C ) C 1 E ( g RECEIVERR ) TV DSS/VCR2 ( RC-5 MULTI RC DVD ( R ) 2 E N ( INI H S INPUT 4 A DVD L FLASHERF INPUT 2 f OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 ) R P ) T / U R TV VCR1 O ( C (

Y C s 11 22 DC OUTD ) IN INPUT 1 INPUT 3 B P / B C DSS/VCR2 ( IN OUT INPUT 4 AUDIO YY OUT OUT MULTI MONITOR ) VCR1 ( ) OUT 4 ( IDEO PONENT INPUT 3 X. . /VCR2 S/VCR2 A T V S S M FLASHER IN EMITTER OUT (SR8001 Only) RS232C DC OUT (DC TRIGGER) CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT OTHER CONNECTING This receiver can be controlled by connecting a a This receiver can be controlled by connecting control box or other control device to this receiver. f d the IR Outputs the remote control signal input to can RECEIVER IN terminals. External components be controlled by connecting them to the EMITTER terminal. OUT External devices can be controlled from the SR7001 External devices can be controlled from the SR7001 terminal (12 V). by connecting them to the DC OUT Connect an external control device or other device for Connect an external control device or other device servicing. (Use a straight cable for the connection.) s a

ENGLISH 20 Note: the remotecontrolunitoronfrontpanel. the cursor( which makesvariousoperationspossiblebyusing The SR7001incorporatesanonscreenmenusystem, must beperformed. After allcomponentsareconnected,initialsetup Thereare6itemsintheMAINMENU.

Notes: Note:

(2) Selectthe“ (1) SETUP 4. 3. 2. 1. ONSCREEN DISPLAY MENU SYSTEM Selectthedesiredsub-menuwith Press the Press the To exitfromOSDmenusystem,pressthe • Ifyoudesiretoadjustanysub-menu, youneedtoset • • Settings areenteredwiththe • • To locksub-menus,setitems1-6ontheMAIN or MAIN MENU. Move thecursorto“1.INPUT SETUP”inthe button asifitwerethe 15, 16) or HDMIinputofyour TV orprojector. (Seepage panel tothecomposite,S-Video, componentvideo have connectedtheMONITOR OUT jackontherear To viewtheonscreendisplays,makecertainyou When usingtheremotecontrolunit, usethe it to unit orthe MENU to“ 4 is displayed. The “ or pressthe the setupmenusfromSR7001.) unit. (Thisstepisnotneededwhenoperating press the EXIT sub-menu. button. The displaywillchangetotheselected 2 cursorbuttonsandpressthe cursorbuttons. UNLOCKED button, ormovethecursorto MAIN MENU 3 , 4 0 OK LOCKED OK MENU , AMP ” markleftof“ 1 MENU / , buttonontheremotecontrolunit. ENTER 2 buttonontheremotecontrol . buttonontheremotecontrol ) and ” oftheOSDmenusystem buttononthefrontpanel. ”. ENTER button. OK LOCKED ENTER / ENTER button. buttononthe OK ” withthe buttonson EXIT / ENTER

3 and OK or 1

Press thisbuttontodisplay RC8001SR BUTTON CONTROL SR7001 FRONTBUTTON CONTROL the OSDmenusystem. Press thisbuttontodisplaythe LEFT button MENU button LEFT button OK button OSD menusystem. MENU button AUTO THX UT T-MODE MULTI CH MENU 7.1CH INPUT 7.1CH PREV TE MENU 4 1 S T SPEAKER MULTI DOWN button UP button ENTER LIPá CH. GUIDE ATT OK S 5 2 S YNC EL BAND DISPLAY EXIT MUTE S S PK-AB MEMORY VOL EXIT URR MIC 6 3 OSD menusystem. Press thisbuttontoexitthe EXIT button ENTER button MultEQ RIGHT button menu system. Press thisbuttontoexittheOSD EXIT button DOWN button RIGHT button UP button TUNER TAPE AMP (Ampliﬁ 12 AUX1 Lear CD n i ng RC RemoteCo LIGHT 8 500 S R AUX2 CD-R n troller er) button AMP MD 21 ENGLISH B EXIT EXIT A SUB MENU

OFF NEXT NEXT SETUP” A and B selection options. A SETUP” EQ.MODE : MULTI ROOM SETUP • ROOM “MULTI The SR7001 does not have 6.ACOUSTIC EQ. PRESET G.EQ ADJ CHECK AUTO RETURN 5.PREFERENCE DC TRIGGER SETUP 1 2 STANDBY : NORMAL BILINGUAL : MAIN+SUB HDMI AUDIO: THROUGH RETURN “5. PREFERENCE” (P. 35) “5. PREFERENCE” (P. Note: 37) ACOUSTIC EQ” (P. “6. EXIT EXIT EXIT

NEXT NEXT MAIN MENU AUTO :DISABLE AUTO . and “COMPO OUT 2” sub-menus. and “COMPO OUT CHANNEL LEVEL • The SR7001 does not have the “HDMI OUT” MAIN MENU MAIN SETUP 1.INPUT SETUP 2.SPKR SETUP LOCKED 3.SURR SETUP 4.VIDEO UNLOCK 5.PREFERENCE 6.ACOUSTIC EQ NEXT RETURN OSD INFO :ENABLE I/P CONVERT :DISABLE HDMI OUT :OUTPUT1 COMPO OUT2 :MAIN RETURN 3.SURR SETUP PL x MUSIC PARAMETER CS PARAMETER NEO:6 PARAMETER RE-EQ : OFF LFE LEVEL : -10dB RETURN 4.VIDEO SETUP VIDEO CONVERT TV “4. VIDEO SETUP” (P. 34) “4. VIDEO SETUP” (P. Note: “3. SURROUND SETUP” (P. 32) “3. SURROUND SETUP” (P. EXIT EXIT

NEXT NEXT AUTO SETUP FUNC INPUT SETUP 2.SPKR SETUP MANUAL SETUP THX AUDIO SETUP RETURN 1.INPUT SETUP 7.1CH INPUT SETUP FUNCTION RENAME RETURN “2. SPEAKER SETUP” (P. 26) “2. SPEAKER SETUP” (P. “1. INPUT SETUP” (P. 23) (P. SETUP” “1. INPUT

2 and

1 button. , 4 , 3

ENTER / OK ” with the ” with RETURN cursor buttons and press the cursor buttons cursor to “ cursor • move of the setup, this portion complete After you Note:

ENGLISH 22 “1-3FUNCTIONRENAME”(seepage25) • “1-27.1CHINPUT SETUP”(seepage24) • “1-1FUNCINPUT SETUP”(see page 24) • receiver. connected audiodevicesandtheinputjacksofthis This menuisforsettingthematchingoutputof 2. 1. FUNCRENAME: 7.1CHINPUTSETUP: FUNCINPUTSETUP: 1 INPUTSETUP Select “ Selectthedesiredsub-menuwith MENU with button. 4 OK cursorbuttons,andpressthe / ENTER RETURN FUNCTIONRENAME 7.1CHINPUTSETUP 1.INPUTSETUP FUNC INPUTSETUP 1. INPUTSETUP button. 3 or 4 cursorbutton,andpressthe

NEXT ” fromtheMAIN

EXIT OK / ENTER

3 or

☞ RETURN BACK 3 - - 2 - AUX2:ANA 5- CD/R:AUTO TAPE:ANA - - FUNC:MODE FUNCINPUTSETUP2 - 1 RETURN NEXT 4 4 4 2 AUX1 4 2 DSS :AUTO 2 VCR1 2 DVD :AUTO : TV FUNC:MODE FUNCINPUTSETUP1 P. 24 :AUTO F - - - - :AUTO F 3 3 3 :AUTO 3 AUTO 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I DICM V/S C0MP DIG HDMI V/S COMP DIG HDMI T

EXIT EXIT ☞ RETURN FUNCTIONRENAME 7.1CHINPUTSETUP 1.INPUTSETUP RETURN SUBW:0dB SURR.L:0dB SURR.BL:0dB SURR.BR:0dB SURR.R:0dB FRONTR:0dB CENTER:0dB FRONTL:0dB VIDEO-IN: 7.1CHINPUTSETUP FUNC INPUTSETUP P. 24 NEXT NEXT

LAST EXIT EXIT ☞ RETURN _{|}SPACE BACKDEFAULT %&’() stuvwxyz0123456789!"#$ WXYZabcdefghijklmnopqr ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV RENAME :TV______FUNCTION: FUNCTIONRENAME P. 25 * +, . ./:;<=>? __ TV NEXT

EXIT 23 ENGLISH , and 1 cursor cursor , 4 button to 4 , or 3 3 ENTER / OK ” with the cursor buttons, adjust the adjust the buttons, cursor 2 RETURN or 1 buttons. volume level of each channel. volume level +12 dB in 1 dB increments on all channels except the +12 dB in 1 dB increments -18dB W), which can be set from subwoofer (SUB to +12 dB in 1 dB increments. • • dB and The volume level can be set between -12 the with desired channel Select the Using cursor buttons, and press the cursor buttons, 5. 4. 2 menu. SETUP go to the 1.INPUT Note:

Move the cursor to “ Move the cursor

↔ cursor cursor cursor 4 DSS 4 ” from the ” from the ↔ or button. or 3 3 EXIT LAST ... VCR1 ENTER ↔ /

no signal is emitted from ↔ NEXT OK ” with the LAST cursor buttons, select the the cursor buttons, select DVD 2 ↔ ↔ ” is selected, ” is selected, the source is set to the ” is selected, the source is set to the or 1 TV 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP 7.1 CH INPUT V-OFF V-OFF VIDEO-IN ↔ LAST cursor buttons as follows; ↔ V-OFF 2 7.1CH INPUT SETUP VIDEO-IN : 0dB FRONT L : 0dB CENTER : 0dB FRONT R : 0dB SURR.R : 0dB SURR.B R : 0dB SURR.B L : 0dB SURR. L : 0dB SUB W : RETURN “ or 1 1.INPUT SETUP menu with the SETUP 1.INPUT AUX1 AUX1 buttons. LAST buttons and press the video input source to be played through the video input source to be played through the jack. OUT MONITOR MONITOR OUT jack. OUT MONITOR When “ activated. source selected before the 7.1 ch input menu was source selected before the 7.1 ch input menu was • • When Select “ Select Select “ Select the Using 1. 2. 3. Notes: Notes:

1-2 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP CH INPUT 1-2 7.1 for 7.1- speaker levels the is for adjusting This menu input sources. channel each channel so adjust the volume for Here you will at the same all heard by the listener that they are level.

the The input source is switched by pressing

/ , / , ✽ 1 4 , OK OK , 4 3 , cursor cursor 3 2 button. ” with , and EXIT

” with the , ENTER / 4 , RETURN OK button. button. 3 NEXT DIG HDMI C0MP V/S cursor buttons. ENTER ENTER / / 2 ” with the OK OK or cursor buttons and press the 1 2 button. button to go to the next page. cursor buttons and then press the mark in AUX.1 indicates that other inputs that other inputs AUX.1 indicates mark in TAPE:ANA - - - 1 - FUNC INPUT SETUP 2 FUNC:MODE - TAPE:ANA - CD/R:AUTO 5 - AUX2:ANA - 2 - - - 3 RETURN BACK 2 ✽ BACK , and ENTER the Func Input Setup 2 menu, move the cursor to “ 1 ENTER buttons and press the move the cursor to “ move the cursor to “ with the and mark. HDMI AUDIO of “5. PREFERENCE” is set to is set to of “5. PREFERENCE” AUDIO HDMI the SR7001. audio is not output from THROUGH, (See page 35) assigning to input functions. cannot be assigned. • Assignments cannot be made in sections with a • When FUNCTION MODE is set to HDMI and and MODE is set to HDMI When FUNCTION • • the same numbers when and S-video can use Video The • all items are set. Repeat steps 2-5 until Press the Press Select each mode setting and input terminal the Press items are set. Repeat steps 2-5 until all you complete this portion of the setup, After Assign the number of an HDMI input jack to the input jack of an HDMI the number Assign device. a component video input Assign the number of jack to the device. a composite video and S- Assign the number of device. video input jack to the 4. 3. 7. 8. 5. 6. return to the Func Input Setup 1 menu from To

After you complete this portion of the setup, Note:

HDMI Note: COMP V/S Note:

cursor cursor 2 4 ” from the ” from the or button. 3 , and 1 EXIT ,

4 T , ENTER / 3 OK DIG HDMI COMP V/S 1 1 1 1 AUTO ”, for automatic detection of the ”, for automatic detection of the , when only a HDMI signal will be :AUTO 3 3 3 3 :AUTO F - - ” ” for input sources for which no digital FUNC INPUT SETUP ”, when only a digital signal will be ”, when only a digital signal will be AUTO DIG FUNC INPUT SETUP 1 FUNC INPUT SETUP FUNC:MODE TV : DVD :AUTO 2 VCR1 2 2 2 RETURN NEXT DSS :AUTO 4 AUX1 4 4 4 HDMI ANA

. buttons and press the 1.INPUT SETUP menu with the SETUP 1.INPUT buttons, and assign a mode and input jack buttons, and assign a mode and input jack V/S). (DIG, HDMI, COMP, Select a setting with the Select “ Select digital input signal condition. If there is no digital signal, but there is an analog signal present, the analog signal will be played. is the initial setting of all input sources. "AUTO" Select “ used. Select “ Select “ Select “ input jacks are used. to a 6 and F(Front) digital inputs can be assigned desired source. the Assign the number of a digital input jack to device. used HDMI: AUTO: ANA: DIG: 2. 1. MODE

1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP SETUP INPUT 1-1 FUNC INPUT) DIGITAL (ASSIGNABLE to assigned can be digital inputs and F (Front) The 6 a desired source. to inputs can be assigned HDMI and COMPONENT source. the preferred input jacks are to select which digital Use this menu to which input source. to be assigned DIG

ENGLISH 24

OSD Setupmenu. display andtheOSD,butitdoesnotappearin the display.) This nameappearsonthereceiver'sFL (Characters areselectedfromthoseappearingon can beupto10characterslong,includingspaces. This menuisforrenamingfunctionname.Names This menuisforrenaminginputsource. Input sourcescanberegisteredunderanyname. 1-3 FUNCTIONRENAME

8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Press the Selectacharacterwiththe Movethecursor tothecharacterlistwith Movethecursortocharacter(1st10th) Select “ Selectaninputsourcewiththe Select “ Select “ cursor buttons. selected letter. buttons andpressthe buttons. to beginwith.) cursor button.(Movethetoletter“A” buttons. change withthe INPUT SETUP menuwiththe buttons. %&’() stuvwxyz0123456789!"#$ WXYZabcdefghijklmnopqr ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV RENAME :TV______FUNCTION: FUNCTIONRENAME RETURN _{|}SPACE BACKDEFAULT FUNCTION FUNCTION RENAME RENAME OK * +, / ENTER . 1 ./:;<=>? or ” withthe __ TV ” withthe 2 OK cursorbuttons. NEXT buttontoenterthe / ENTER

3 EXIT 3 3 , 3 ” fromthe1. or 1 or 4 or button. or , 1 4 4 4 2 , and cursor cursor cursor cursor 4 2

Move thecursorto“ Note: go tothe1.INPUT SETUP menu. 2 9. cursorbuttonsandpressthe BACK: DEFAULT: SPACE: “ Deletes thecharacterleftofcursorin Restores thenamein“ name inthe“ Inserts aspaceatthecursorpointof“ area. RENAME Repeatsteps5-8untilthenewnameisinput. • RENAME cannotbeleftblank. •

” areaonecharacteratatime. FUNCTION RETURN ” area. ” withthe RENAME OK / ENTER 3 ” areatothe , RENAME 4 buttonto , 1 , and ” 25 ENGLISH EXIT TOGETHER P. 31 P. THX AUDIO SETUP ADVANCED SPKR ARRAY SURR.B SPKR : RETURN ☞ EXIT EXIT EXIT

NO m MANUAL P. 30 P. SPEAKER LEVEL TEST MODE : FRONT L : 0.0dB CENTER : 0.0dB FRONT R : 0.0dB SURR.R : 0.0dB SURR.B R : 0.0dB SURR.B L : 0.0dB SURR.L : 0.0dB SUB W : 0.0dB RETURN BACK SPEAKER SIZE THX SPKR : SUB W : YES FRONT : SMALL CENTER : SMALL SURR. : SMALL SURR.B : 2CH SURR.B SIZE : SMALL LPF/HPF : 80Hz BASS MIX : RETURN NEXT SPEAKER DISTANCE UNIT : m FRONT L : 3.05 m CENTER : 3.05 m FRONT R : 3.05 SURR.R : 3.05 m SURR.B R : 3.05 m SURR.B L : 3.05 m SURR.L : 3.05 m SUB W : 3.05 m RETURN BACK NEXT ☞ EXIT EXIT

CANCEL ______AUTO SETUP AUTO 2.SPKR SETUP 2.SPKR SETUP MANUAL SETUP THX AUDIO RETURN SPEAKER CONFIG AUTO SETUP !! NOW CALCULATE AUTO SETUP NOW ANALYZING!! CHECK RESULT SPEAKER SIZE DISTANCE CHANNEL LEVEL CROSSOVER FREQ STORE EXIT EXIT EXIT

START CANCEL START

P. 27 P. AUTO SETUP AUTO SETUP: MAIN ROOM SURR BACK: 2CH RETURN AUTO SETUP SPEAKERS CHECK:-- !! NOW ANALYZING AUTO SETUP SPEAKERS CHECK:OK 1ST MIC POSITION!! CHECK ☞ / OK cursor button to 4 or button. 3 EXIT ENTER / ENTER / OK (see page 31) ” from the MAIN MENU ” from the MAIN MENU

OK (see page 30) button. The cursor will move button. : : ” and press the ENTER cursor buttons and press the cursor buttons and press / : 4 OK button. 2.SPKR SETUP or AUTO SETUP 2.SPKR SETUP MANUAL SETUP THX AUDIO SETUP RETURN 3 RETURN (see page 27) ENTER buttons, and press the with press the to “ go to the Sub-menu. • After you complete this the portion of the setup, After you complete this the portion of the setup, • Select the desired menu with the Select “ Select 2 SPKR (SPEAKER) SETUP (SPEAKER) 2 SPKR AUTO SETUP AUTO MANUAL SETUP MANUAL SETUP AUDIO THX 1. 2.

“2-3 THX AUDIO SETUP” AUDIO THX “2-3 Setup)” (MultEQ SETUP AUTO “2-1 SETUP” “2-2 MANUAL After you have installed the SR7001 connected all all SR7001 connected the you have installed After speaker layout, and determined the the components in the Speaker to perform the settings it is now time acoustics for for the optimum sound Setup menu and speaker layout. your environment settings, it is perform the following Before you the following that you first determine important characteristics: • • • Note:

ENGLISH 26 listening area. made toimprovethesoundcharacteristicsof original algorithmandenvironmentalsettingsare The measurementresultsareanalyzedusingan listening positions,usingthesuppliedmicrophone. test toneemittedbyeachchannelinamaximumof6 To dothis,the AUTO SETUP featuremeasuresa multiple listeners. SR7001 providesthebestlisteningenvironmentfor The Audyssey MultEQªtechnologyadoptedbythe and automaticallyoptimizessettings. speaker systemandroomwherethereceiverisused the SR7001measuressoundcharacteristicsof The AUTO SETUP (MultEQªSetup)featureof 2-1 AUTO SETUP (MultEQ™SETUP) Notes: 2. 1. condition, thereforeturnpowertothemonitoron. During measurement,theOSDmenudisplays HOW TO PERFORMAUTO SETUP see “MANUAL SETUP”onpage30ofthemanual. distance, etc.)withoutusingthe AUTO SETUP feature, To setupthespeakersystem(i.e.,adjusting Setthe microphoneinthelisteningposition. ConnectthesuppliedmicrophonetoMIC Fortheﬁ • Measurement canbedoneinamaximumof6 main listeningposition. listening positions. jack ontheSR7001. OE NOFPHONES POWER ON/OFF STANDBY INPUT SELECTOR rst measurement, setthemicrophonein the AV SURROUNDRECEIVERSR7500 DISP SLEEP MULTI AUTO URDIRECT SURR AUTO TUNED ST DISC 6.1 SPKR AB ENTER MTX 6.1MTX V-OFF NIGHT PEAK ATT DIGITAL AAC ANALOG PCM LSSR S SL DIGITAL SURROUND L LFE C R DOWN IIA IE R L VIDEO DIGITAL S-VIDEO AUX 1INPUT VOLUME AUDIO UP

Duringthedetectioncheck,following Select “ Fora5.1channelspeakersystem,select 5.

4. 3. Detection Check Selectthenumberofchannelsforsurround Eitherpressthe • The testtoneoutputfromthespeakersduring Duringmeasurement,stepawayfromthemicrophone • • To usetheinternalsubwooferofamp,set Remove anyobstructionsbetweenthespeakersand • Use astandortripodtopositionthemicrophoneat • watch outforsmallchildren. measurement isloud.Bemindfulofneighborsand sound. from apositionthatisoutofthepathspeaker and operatetheSR7001viaremotecontrolunit frequency tothehighest. volume tothemiddlepointandsetcrossover microphone. ear heightinthelisteningposition. measurement. SETUP SETUP” fromtheMAINMENU,select“ front paneloftheSR7001orselect“2.SPKR screen. press the and pressthe polarity. room, whethertherearespeakers ornotand made todetectdarksoundinthelistening OSD appearsonthedisplayandchecksare page 19,36.) speaker Cormultispeaker, select“NON”.See “NON” (SurroundBackspeakeroff). (To use back speakeryouareusing. NOWANALYZING!! SPEAKERSCHECK:-- AUTOSETUP RETURN SURRBACK: MAINROOM AUTOSETUP:START AUTOSETUP ” withthe START OK/ENTER

” withthe CANCEL OK/ENTER MultEQ™ 3 buttontodisplaythestart / 4

cursorbuttons,and 2CH 3 / 4 buttontostart buttononthe EXIT EXIT cursorbuttons AUTO AUTO

Atthispoint,youcanselect“ Note: Afterconfirmingthecheckresults,select Ifthecheckresultsindicateanerror, takesuitable Here,toviewtheresultsofdetectioncheck, 6. When thedetectioncheckends,following Forexample,ifthecenterspeakerisnotused, The detectioncheckmeasuresthestateofuseall • time. the microphoneoroperateSR7001duringthis to theR-channel,thereforebecarefulnotunplug test tonewillrequiretimetogofromtheL-channel speakers whetheractuallyusedornot. OSD appearsonthedisplay. Setup andreturnto“2.SPKRSETUP”. OSD menu. press the “ page 29.) messages, see“ERRORMESSAGES”on action withthatitemandremeasure.(Forerror will bedisplayed. and pressthe select “ RETURN RETURN SUB W:YES SURR.L :YES SURR.B L:NON SURR.B R:NON SURR.R :YES FRONT R:YES CENTER :NON FRONT :YES CHECK!!SPEAKER SPEAKERCONFIG CHECK 1STMICPOSITION!! SPEAKERSCHECK:OK AUTOSETUP CHECK ” withthe OK/ENTER

OK/ENTER ” withthe START 3 buttontoreturnthe /

4 cursorbuttonsand button. The results 3 / EXIT 4 EXIT EXIT cursorbuttons ” toend Auto Whenthismeasurementends,thefollowing Select “ 7. Duringmeasurement,thefollowingOSD Calibration Check OSD appearsonthedisplay OK/ENTER with the cancel measurementbyselecting“ appears onthedisplay. At thispoint,youcan the ﬁ and pressthe rst point(mainlisteningposition). NOWANALYZING!! AUTOSETUP CALCULATE 2NDMICPOSITION!! SPEAKERSCHECK:OK AUTOSETUP CHECK 1STMICPOSITION!! SPEAKERSCHECK:OK AUTOSETUP START 3 / 4 button. cursorbuttonsandpressingthe OK/ENTER ” withthe CANCEL START START

3 buttontomeasure / 4 EXIT EXIT EXIT cursorbuttons CANCEL ” 27 ENGLISH EXIT

AUTO SETUP 2.SPKR SETUP 2.SPKR SETUP MANUAL THX AUDIO SETUP RETURN Pressing “EXIT” prior to pressing “STORE” erases all erases “STORE” to pressing “EXIT” prior Pressing therefore results, and calculation results measurement with care. control unit the remote operate following OSD operations end, the When storing display. appears on the Do not turn the power to the SR7001 off while storing while the SR7001 off Do not turn the power to This may erase all data in the parameters in memory. may damage the receiver. memory and SR7001’s Note: Note: cursor 4 / button to button to 3 ” and press EXIT ” and press the ” and press the EXIT

” with the OK/ENTER NEXT

STORE button. RETURN NEXT button to store all parameters button to store all parameters and speaker size screen for rmation STORE Conﬁ frequency crossover

CHANNEL LEVEL FRONT L : 0.0dB CENTER : -6.5dB FRONT R : -1.5dB SURR.R : +1.0dB SURR.B R : +9.5dB SURR.B L : +12.0dB SURR.L : -2.5dB SUB W : -12.5dB RETURN CROSSOVER FREQ FRONT : AUTO CENTER : AUTO SURR : AUTO SURR.B : AUTO RETURN SPEAKER SIZE SPEAKER : AUTO FRONT L : AUTO CENTER : AUTO FRONT R : AUTO SURR.R : AUTO SURR.B R : AUTO SURR.B L : AUTO SURR.L : AUTO SUB W RETURN

CHECK RESULT SPEAKER CONFIG SPEAKER SIZE DISTANCE CHANNEL LEVEL CROSSOVER FREQ OK/ENTER results, select “ the buttons and press the display the CHECK RESULT screen. display the CHECK RESULT OK/ENTER including the equalizer parameters in memory. If not wanting to store the calculation results in place the cursor on “ memory, Storing Measurement Results in Memory size and crossover frequency results were frequency results were size and crossover automatically measured. Place the cursor on “ * * to indicate that the speaker is displayed AUTO 11. the measurement Once finished confirming [Example] cursor cursor 4 / button to button to 3

EXIT

the cursor buttons. m 2 OK/ENTER / NEXT

1 cursor button is pressed, cursor button is pressed, 2 / 1 rmation screen for speaker detection rmation screen for rmation screen for the distance from SPEAKER CONFIG SPEAKER Conﬁ Conﬁ speakers to the listening position

DISTANCE UNIT : FRONT L : 3.05 m CENTER : 3.05 m FRONT R : 3.05 m SURR.R : 3.05 m SURR.B R : 3.05 m SURR.B L : 3.05 m SURR.L : 3.05 m SUB W : 3.05 m RETURN NEXT SPEAKER CONFIG CHECK !! SPEAKER FRONT : YES CENTER : NON FRONT R : YES SURR.R : YES SURR.B R : NON SURR.B L : NON SURR.L : YES SUB W : YES RETURN CHECK RESULT CHECK SIZE SPEAKER DISTANCE LEVEL CHANNEL FREQ CROSSOVER STORE enter them. buttons and press the buttons and press the end, a screen appears for confirming the the confirming for a screen appears end, results. calculation Results Measurement Checking To check equalizer (MultEQ) parameters, see page see page check equalizer (MultEQ) parameters, To 38. the units alternate between [ft] (feet) and [m] [m] the units alternate between [ft] (feet) and (meters). Each time a [ft] of UNIT and pressing and pressing [ft] of UNIT Note: Note: [Example] * The units can be changed by moving the cursor to [Example] items to check with the Select 10. results for the measurement When calculations

cursor cursor cursor cursor button button 4 4 / / button to to button 3 OK/ENTER 3 EXIT EXIT EXIT OK/ENTER ” with the ” with OK/ENTER

” with the START CALCULATE CALCULATE ” and pressing the ” and pressing ______CALCULATE AUTO SETUP SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

AUTO SETUP AUTO SPEAKERS CHECK:OK 2ND MIC POSITION!! START

AUTO SETUP NOW CALCULATE !! CALCULATE button. OSD appears on the display. points between the main listening position and points between the main surrounding positions. buttons and press the and press buttons position, select “ position, point, you At this second point. measure the and second point measurement can cancel by selecting results calculate measurement “ buttons and press the to calculate measurement results. During calculations, the following OSD appears on the display. on the number of connected speakers and measured The more speakers and listening listening positions. positions, the more time is needed. recommended to measure in all 6 positions in order recommended to measure in all 6 positions in order to obtain the best results. • The time needed to complete calculations depends • Less than 6 positions can be measured, but it is Less than 6 positions can be measured, but it is • steps 7 and 8 until measuring 6 Repeat listening to the second Move the microphone 8. all measurements end, the following When Note: Note: Select “ Select 9. 8.

ENGLISH 28 ERROR MESSAGES ANALYZE ERROR!! NOISE ERROR!! MIC SET ERROR!! Under ANALYZE ERROR,select “NEXT”withthe * buttons andpressthe following appearsonthedisplay. RETURN ANALYZEERROR!! SPEAKERSCHECK: AUTOSETUP RETURN NOISEERROR!! SPEAKERSCHECK: AUTOSETUP RETURN MICSETERROR!! SURRBACK:2CH MAINROOM AUTOSETUP: AUTOSETUP RETURN SUB W:YES SURR.L :NONERR SURR.B L:YESERR SURR.B R:YESERR SURR.R :NONERR FRONT R:YESREV CENTER :NON FRONT L:YESREV CHECK!!SPEAKER SPEAKERCONFIG OK/ENTER ipae ro as How toRemedy Cause Displayed Error START button. A detailscreenlikethe NEXT EXIT

EXIT EXIT EXIT 3 / 4 cursor (To usejustonesurroundbackspeaker, connectittotheL- Whenusingjustonesurroundbackspeaker, butitisconnectedto ¥ connected asfollows. An errorisindicatedinadditiontotheaboveifspeakersare (Inthiskind ofsituation,[ERR]isdisplayedforallsurroundand Thesurroundspeakerisnotconnected([NON]displayed),but ¥ Thepolarityoftheleftandrightchannelsfrontspeakersis ¥ In theexamplesatleft,followingtroubleisdetected. Speakerpolarityisconnectedbackwards. ¥ Thespeakersrequiredforsuitableplaybackwerenotdetected. ¥ Volume fromthespeakersislow. ¥ Thereistoomuch noiseinthelisteningroomtomeasureproperly. Connecttheincludedmicrophone. ¥ ¥ Themicrophoneisnotproperlyconnected. ¥ channel.) the surroundbackR-channel surround backspeakers.) the surroundbackspeakerisconnected backwards ([REV]appearsonthedisplay.) Checkspeakerdirectionandlayout ¥ ([REV]canappearwithsomespeakersevenwhenproperly Checkthespeakerthatisindicatedashavingreversedpolarity ¥ Measureatatimewhenthesurroundingareaisquiet. ¥ Duringmeasurement, turnoff devicesthatmakenoisesuch asair ¥ Checkthemicrophoneconnection. ¥ connected. Insuchcase,ignoretheerrorindication.) conditioners. 29 ENGLISH

”, 1 NONE cursor cursor Marantz 4 or 3 (feet) for UNIT (feet) for UNIT EXIT website for further ft

m guration. If you are unsure, have guration. If you are (meters) or www.cedia.org guration sub-menu will not appear cursor buttons. m 2 or 1 SPEAKER DISTANCE SPEAKER : UNIT : 3.05 m FRONT L : 3.05 m CENTER : 3.05 m FRONT R : 3.05 m SURR.R : 3.05 m SURR.B R : 3.05 m SURR.B L : 3.05 m SURR.L : 3.05 m SUB W BACK NEXT RETURN

cursor buttons.

2 buttons. with the the speaker conﬁ useful books and special here. (There are several available to guide you through proper DVD and LD’s home theater conﬁ your Marantz dealer perform the installation for you. They are trained professionals familiar with even the most sophisticated custom installations. recommends the information.) or Set the distance for each speaker , press the • For speakers for which you have selected “ Select either Select Select each speaker with the Set the distance from the front left speaker to your Set the distance from the front left speaker to normal listening position. your Set the distance from the center speaker to normal listening position. to Set the distance from the front right speaker your normal listening position. to Set the distance from the surround left speaker your normal listening position. Set the distance from the surround right speaker to your normal listening position. 8. 9. 10.

” 1 → , 4 ENTER , / 3 LARGE

OK 140Hz ” is set for the → YES ” with the 120Hz NEXT → ”, the low frequencies will play 100Hz MIX → ” is selected, the low frequencies will ” is selected for the SURR. setting, then for the SURR. setting, then ” is selected cursor buttons and press the

2 BOTH 180Hz 80Hz NONE → → and move the cursor to “ After you complete this portion of the setup, After you complete this portion of the setup, button to go to the next page. this setting is not available. this setting is frequency. If using large front speakers, set a slightly If using large frequency. lower frequency. DTS will be played through the subwoofer. DTS will be played through the subwoofer. • If “ • If • If using small front speakers, set a slightly higher • If using small front speakers, • LFE signals during playback of Dolby Digital or during playback of Dolby Digital or LFE signals •

Select if the surround back speakers are large. are back speakers if the surround Select are small. surround back speakers Select if the is set for the front speakers and “ subwoofer during stereo playback. PCM or analog stereo sources. the be played through the main L&R speakers and subwoofer. but expands more uniformly throughout the room, depending on the size and shape of the room, interference may result in a decrease of the actual volume of the low frequency range. through the main L&R only. This selection is selection is This through the main L&R only. THX. preferred by 7. SURR. BACK SIZE BACK SURR. LARGE: SMALL: Note: LPF/HPF you can select the cutoff When you use a subwoofer, speakers used. Select one of frequency for the small levels according to the size the crossover frequency of the small speakers connected. 60Hz 160Hz Note: MIX BASS ¥ The bass mix setting is only valid when “ only during playback of setting has effect This “ ¥ When In this playback mode, the low frequency range ¥ By selecting “ Note: Note:

”. .” NONE LARGE xed to “ “ xed at ” is selected for the SURR. setting, then ” is selected for the subwoofer setting, then ” is selected for the subwoofer

NO NONE

this setting is ﬁ this setting is ﬁ

• If “ • If • If “ • If Select if no surround back left and right speakers Select if no surround back left and right speakers are connected. Select if the surround back left and right speakers are connected. Select if the surround left and right speakers are Select if the surround left and right speakers small. Select if no surround left and right speakers are Select if no surround left and right speakers connected. are Select if the surround left and right speakers large. Select if the center speaker is small. Select if the center speaker Select if no center speaker is connected. Select if no center speaker is large. Select if the center speaker Select if one surround back speaker is connected. the In this case, the audio signal is emitted from output terminal. SURR BACK LEFT Select if the front speakers are small. Select if the front speakers Select when a subwoofer is connected. is when a subwoofer Select a subwoofer is not connected. Select when front speakers are large. Select if the 2CH: 1CH: SURR. B SURR. NONE: LARGE: SMALL: SURR. NONE: LARGE: SMALL: CENTER NONE: Notes: SUB W YES: NO: FRONT LARGE: SMALL:

2 4 and or 1 or 1 , cursor cursor 3 ENTER / 4 4 , 3 OK or 3 ” and the front ” and the front EXIT

”. ” from the MAIN the MAIN ” from ” with the NO ,” then the sound will ” with the button to enter the enter the button to NONE YES NEXT LARGE ENTER ”. / OK 2. SPKR SETUP 2. MANUAL SETUP MANUAL SMALL ”. SPEAKER SIZE THX SPKR : SUB W : YES FRONT : SMALL CENTER : SMALL SURR. : SMALL SURR.B : 2CH SURR.B SIZE : SMALL LPF/HPF : 80Hz BASS MIX : RETURN NEXT and the surround back speaker size should

”. cursor buttons and press the 2 buttons. move the cursor to “ button to go to the next page. MENU. selection. cursor buttons. cursor buttons. SMALL Set the size of each speaker with the you complete this portion of the setup, After Select each speaker with the Select “ Select the Press Select “ Select 80Hz be output from both the left and right speakers. should be “ “ The complete frequency range for the channel you The complete frequency range for the channel are setting will be output from the speaker. that Frequencies of the channel you are setting from are lower than approx. 80 Hz will be output the subwoofer. speakers are set to “ If the SUB. W is set to “ 5. 6. 4. 2. 3. 1. THX SPKR THX speaker systems which If you are using a full THX Ltd: are approved by ¥ The front, center and surround speaker size ¥ The subwoofer should be “ need to set the number of surround back You speakers ¥ ¥ be LPF/HPF (the crossover frequency) should

SMALL: SMALL: When setting the speaker size in the SPEAKER size in the SPEAKER When setting the speaker below. SIZE menu, use the guidelines LARGE:

2-2 MANUAL SETUP 2-2 MANUAL be “

ENGLISH 30 Notes: SURR. BR: SURR. BL: Note: Slow responce. 75dB SPL whenthemeterissetto“C”weightingand adjust thelevelofeachspeakerin turnunititreads arms length,andpointingstraight upattheceiling, Pressure Level)meteratthelistening position,at level. We recommendholdingadBSPL (Sound that theyareallheardbythelisteneratsame Here youcansetthevolumeforeachspeakerso 11. SUB W: speaker toyournormallisteningposition. Set thedistancefromsurroundbackright speaker toyournormallisteningposition. Set thedistancefromsurroundbackleft normal listeningposition. Set thedistancefromsubwoofertoyour Forthespeakersthatyouhaveselected“ • (ThevaluesappearingontheFL displayare ft:0.1-30.0ftinsteps m:0.03-9.15minsteps Setthedistancetoeachspeakerinmeters(m)orfeet • • The settingofSURR.BACKappearsifitissetfor • The settingforsurr.back L• andsurr.back Rappears • Thespeakerlevel settingsarenotavailablein7.1 After youcompletethisportionofthesetup, approximate.) (ft) asfollows. menu. one surroundbackspeakerintheSPEAKERSIZE SPEAKER SIZEmenu. if itisset,twosurroundbackspeakersinthe speaker sizemenuwillnotappear. Direct mode. Channel Inputmode, PureDirectmodeandSource 2 move thecursorto“ button togothenextpage. cursorbuttonsandpressthe

RETURN BACK S S S S S FRONT R:0.0dB CENTER :0.0dB FRONT L:0.0dB TE

UB W:0.0dB URR.L :0.0dB URR.B L:0.0dB URR.B R:0.0dB URR.R :0.0dB

S T MODE: S PEAKER LEVEL NEXT MANUAL ” withthe

EXIT OK 3 NONE , 4 / ENTER , 1 and ” the

Left Center through inacircularpatternbeginningat If youselect“ TEST MODE: OK After youcompletethisportionofthesetup,press 15. 14. 13. TheSR7001willnowemitthepinknoisefrom Rememberthelevelofthisnoiseandthen 12. each speakeraslistedbelow. If youselect“ same levelforallthespeakers. level ofthenoisefromspeakersothatitis Using the for eachchannel. Back Right Notes: SETUP Press the test tonewiththe Select “ (Notethatthiscanbeadjusted to anylevel / • SUB W can besetfrom–18dB to+12dB. • • To adjustthespeaker levelsfor7.1channelinput • Surr. Surr. BackL and Surr.• BackRappearifitissetfor • Speakers forwhichyouselected“ ENTER → Repeatsteps13and14forthefrontright Press the Using the Move thecursortoFRONT L bypressingthe menu. (Seepage32) sources, youwillneed tousethe7.1ChInputsub speaker intheSPEAKERSIZEmenu. menu. two surroundbackspeakersintheSPEAKER SIZE SPEAKER SIZEmenuwillnotappear. speaker. will nowemitthepinknoisefromfrontright left speaker. speaker sothatitisthesamelevelasfront volume levelofthenoisefromcenter to thesamevolumelevel. other speakersuntilallareadjusted the centerspeaker. press the noise fromthefrontleftspeaker. 4 between -12and+12dBin0.5increments.) Subwoofer cursorbutton. The SR7001willemitapink ”. → Back appearsifitissetforonesurround back Right 1 MANUAL OK buttontomovethecursor“ or →

MANUAL AUTO / Surround Back Left ENTER 4 2 4 1 cursorbuttons,adjustthevolume cursorbutton. cursorbuttonagain. The SR7001 → and → 1 Surround Right ” or“ ”, thetesttonewillbecycled or Left 2 buttontogo“ ”, adjusttheoutputlevelof 2 cursorbuttons,adjustthe AUTO cursorbuttons. , in2secondsincrements ” generationofthe NONE → → Surround Surround RETURN 2. SPKR Left ” inthe → ”.

You cansettheadvancedSpeaker Array. 2-3 THX AUDIO SETUP is, If thedistancebetweensurroundbackspeakers speakers aretogetherandfacingforward. The best ASA effect iswhenthesurroundback SURR.B SPKR: TOGETHER, CLOSEorAPART Advanced SpeakerArray (ASA) back speakers. system setup,selectthedistancebetweensurround channel speakersystemsusedin ASA mode.During This diagramshowsthedesiredpositioningfor7.1 Speaker typeandpositioning 3. 2. 1. urudLSurround-R Surround-L rn- etrFront-R Center Front-L SL ¥ Greater than ¥ Less than ¥ Greater than FL Press the Select “ Select “ (122 cm):CLOSE Surround A selection. MENU. cursor buttons. Surround Back RETURN : SURR.BSPKR ADVANCEDSPKRARRAY THXAUDIOSETUP SBL Surround B LR C 2. SPEAKERSETUP THX AUDIO SETUP 12 in. SBR 12 in. Surround A 48 in. OK (30cm): TOGETHER / ENTER (30cm),andlessthan (122cm): APART FR SR TOGETHER buttontoenterthe Direct RadiatingSpeaker Di-polar RadiatingSpeaker ” withthe ” fromtheMAIN EXIT 3 48 in. or 4

SPKR SETUP menu. buttons andpress the cursorto“ After youcompletethisportionofthesetup,move Note: • If you set •you If will notbeactivated. Speaker Array menu, Advanced SIZE SPEAKER RETURN SURR.B =1CHor NONE OK / ENTER ” with 3 buttontogothe2. , 4 , 1 and 2 cursor inthe 31 ENGLISH

/ 1 4 4 OK or or 3 cursor 3 ENTER ENTER / 2 / OK or OK 1 EXIT

” with the ” from MAIN MENU MAIN MENU ” from level in 0.5 level interval . level in 0.5 level interval .

+12 +12

AUTO cursor buttons and press the press the buttons and cursor 4 ” was selected for the surround back ” was selected for the surround back ” was selected for the center speaker ” was selected for the center speaker and and level in 0.5 level interval . ” was selected for the surround speakers CHANNEL LEVEL CHANNEL 3. SURR SETUP SURR 3. button. or –12 –12 +12 CHANNEL LEVEL SURR.MODE: 0.0dB CENTER : 0.0dB SURR.L : 0.0dB SURR.R : 0.0dB SURR.BACK L : 0.0dB SURR.BACK R : 0.0dB SUB W : RETURN 3 cursor buttons, and press the II NONE NONE NONE 2 and with button. ENTER cursor buttons and press the cursor buttons buttons. cursor buttons, set the desired level with the button. setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will not appear. setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will not appear. speakers setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will not appear. or 1. Multi Ch STEREO 2. CS 3. Others • If “ • • If “ • “ • If Select “ Select “ Select SURR. MODE with the Set the Select the desired menu item with the Set the effect level of the Surround Back speaker Set the effect between Set the effect level of the center speaker between Set the effect –12 level of the Surround speaker Set the effect between The surround mode can be independently set for The surround mode can be independently set 3 modes. SURR. BACK L or R LEVEL: BACK SURR. CENTER LEVEL: SURR L or R LEVEL: SURROUND MODE: SURROUND 1. 2. 4. 3. 3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL 3-1 CHANNEL CHANNEL LEVEL

button button ENTER / OK EXIT EXIT

0.3 0 button to move the cursor to button to move the cursor to NEXT NEXT ” and press the ENTER / OK EXIT RETURN

P. 33 P. P. 33 P. the again to go to sub-menu. “ • complete this portion of the setup, press After you NEO:6 PARAMETER CENTER GAIN : RETURN CS PARAMETER TRUBASS : SRS DIALOG : 0 RETURN ☞ ☞ NEXT Note: EXIT EXIT

CHANNEL LEVEL CHANNEL 3.SURR SETUP 3.SURR PARAMETER x MUSIC PL PARAMETER CS NEO:6 PARAMETER : OFF RE-EQ : LFE LEVEL RETURN DEFAULT NEXT AUTO P. 33 P. P. 32 P. CHANNEL LEVEL SURR.MODE: 0.0dB CENTER : 0.0dB SURR.R : 0.0dB SURR.B R : 0.0dB SURR.B L : 0.0dB SURR.L : 0.0dB SUB W : RETURN PL x MUSIC PARAMETER PARAMETER : PANORAMA :OFF DIMENSION : 0 CENTER WIDTH: 3 RETURN ☞ ☞ cursor cursor cursor cursor 2 2 4 2 , or or 1 or button. 1 1 , 3 4 (see page 33) EXIT ,

3 button. ” from the MAIN ” from the MAIN ” with ENTER (see page 33) / NEXT OFF (see page 32) (see page 33) OK cursor buttons and press cursor buttons and press ENTER / 4 ” or “ ” with the or OK button. 3 –10 dB x MUSIC PARAMETER” x MUSIC PARAMETER” 3. SURR SETUP 3. RETURN PARAMETER” PARAMETER” ”, “ II

II ENTER / CHANNEL LEVEL 3.SURR SETUP PL x MUSIC PARAMETER CS PARAMETER NEO:6 PARAMETER RE-EQ : OFF LFE LEVEL : RETURN 0dB OK PARAMETER: PARAMETER: the buttons and press the MENU with the x MUSIC PARAMETER: x MUSIC PARAMETER: II II Select the desired menu with the Select “ Select Turns THX Cinema Re-EQª on and off. Turns Select the Cinema Re-EQª with the button to activate it. Select the output level of the LFE signal included in the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal. Select “ button. RE-EQ: LFE LEVEL: 3 SURROUND SETUP SETUP 3 SURROUND CS NEO:6 PARAMETER: CHANNEL LEVEL: LEVEL: CHANNEL PL 2. 1. buttons and press the “3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER” “3-2 PL “3-2 CS • “3-3 • • LEVEL” CHANNEL “3-1 This menu is for setting surround effect parameters parameters effect setting surround is for This menu so as to bring surround input signals for the various your speaker system. of audio effect out the live •

After you complete this portion of the setup, move After you complete this portion of the setup, the cursor to “

ENGLISH 32 3. SURRSETUP menu. buttons andpressthe cursor to“ After youcompletethisportionofthesetup,move Note: SUB W LEVEL: SUB W between Set theeffect levelofthesubwooferspeaker • Setting toamodeotherthanmultichannelstereoor • • If “ MANUAL SETUP”. CSII willaffect the speakerlevelasexplainedin“2-2 not appear. setting intheSPEAKERSIZE,thenthiswill NONE RETURN –18 ” wasselectedforthesubwooferspeaker and ” withthe +12 OK levelin0.5interval. / ENTER 3 , 4 buttontogothe , 1 and 2 cursor CENTER WIDTH:

fi In thismode,theSR7001includesthreecontrolsto such asCDs. enveloping surroundambiencefromstereosources Pro Logic 3-2 PL 3. 2. 1. ne-tune thesoundfi DIMENSION: PARAMETER: PANORAMA: sound orabetter blendforthefrontimage. This controlmay helpachieveamorespacious is mixedintothe left andrightspeakers. At itswidestsetting,allthesound fromthecenter speakers. center channelsoundintothefront leftandright Center widthallowsyoutogradually spreadthe 1 levelintervalswiththe Set theCENTERWIDTHlevelbetween recordings. suitable balancefromallthespeakerswithcertain This canbeusefultohelpachieveamore towards therear. Adjust thesoundfi buttons. level in1intervalswiththe the Set theDIMENSIONlevelbetween Select “ Select thePANORAMA mode“ parameters aslistedbelow. If youselect“ cursor buttons. speakers aroundyou,foranexcitingperspective. Panorama wrapsthesoundoffrontleftandright Press the Select “ Select “ selection. ENTER 3 with 1 II or or x (PROLOGIC DEFAULT 3 4 RETURN CENTERWIDTH:3 DIMENSION:0 PANORAMA:OFF PARAMETER: PLxMUSICPARAMETER 2 II or cursorbuttons. cursorbuttons. x-Music modecreatesarichand button. PL 3. SURRSETUP 4 II cursorbuttonsandpressthe CUSTOM OK x MUSICPARAMETER ” or“ eld asfollows. / eld eithertowardsthe front or ENTER II x) MUSICPARAMETER CUSTOM 1 ”, youcanadjustthree or NEXT buttontoenterthe DEFAULT 2 ” inMAINMENU cursorbuttons. ON

” withthe EXIT ” or“ 1 or –3 OFF 0 ” withthe 2 and and cursor 1 ” with or OK 7 +3 in 2 /

Note: buttons andpressthe buttons andpressthe 3-3 CS cursor to“ After youcompletethisportionofthesetup,move cursor to“ After youcompletethisportionofthesetup,move

3. 2. 1. adding exciting,deeperbasseffects. below theactualphysicalcapabilitiesofspeakers TRUBASS producedbythespeakersareanoctave SRS DIALOG: TRUBASS: cannot beselected. setting intheSPEAKERSIZEmenu,this If “ cannot beselected. setting intheSPEAKERSIZEmenu,this If “ the actorssay. effects, allowingthelistenertoeasilydiscernwhat This canbepoppedoutofthesurroundaudio increments increments withthe Set the TRUBASS levelbetween Set theSRSDIALOGlevelbetween Press the Select “ Select “ • This parametercanonly besetintheCSII• mode. NONE NONE selection. cursor buttons. press the MENU withthe II PARAMETER RETURN RETURN RETURN SRSDIALOG:0 TRUBASS: CSPARAMETER ” wasselectedforthecenterspeaker ” wasselectedforthecenterspeaker withthe CS 3. SURROUND SETUP OK OK II PARAMETER / ENTER ” withthe ” withthe /

1 ENTER 1 OK OK 3 or or or / / ENTER ENTER 2 2 button.

cursorbuttons. cursor buttons. NEXT 4 buttontoenterthe 3 3 0 cursorbuttonsand , , 4 4 button. button. ” withthe

, , EXIT 0 1 1 and and and ” fromMAIN 0 and 6 2 2 in1-level 3 cursor cursor 6 or in1- 4

Notes: buttons andpressthe channel. This modeexpandsthesoundimagefromcenter supports 5.1channelinput.) channel outputwithjust2input.(Italso The DTSNEO:6modeenablesamaximum6.1 3-4 NEO:6PARAMETER

cursor to“ After youcompletethisportionofthesetup,move 3. 4. 2. 1. SettheCENTERGAINlevelbetween0.0and Press the Select “ Select “ •“ If This parameter canonlybesetintheNEO:6-Music • mode. disabled. setting intheSPEAKERSIZEmenu,thisis selection. press the 1.0 in0.1level cursor buttons. MENU withthe buttons. NONE RETURN RETURN CENTERGAIN: NEO:6PARAMETER NEO:6 PARAMETER 3. SURROUND SETUP OK ” wasselectedforthecenterspeaker OK / ENTER ” withthe increments / ENTER OK 3 or / ENTER button. NEXT 4 buttontoenterthe 3 cursorbuttonsand withthe , 0.3 4 button.

, ” withthe EXIT 1 and ” fromMAIN 1 or 2 2 cursor 3 cursor or 4

33 ENGLISH cursor cursor cursor 4 4 / 3 / button. 3 EXIT

OK/ENTER cursor buttons and press cursor buttons 4 ANA&HDMI / 3 button. cursor buttons 2 / 1 VIDEO CONVERT TV : DVD : ANA&HDMI VCR1 : ANA&HDMI DSS : ANA&HDMI AUX1 : ANA&HDMI TAPE : ANA&HDMI CD/R : ANA&HDMI AUX2 : ANA&HDMI RETURN BACK OK/ENTER MENU with the MENU with buttons and press the the buttons and set the video conversion mode with the • For details on video convert feature, see page 40. the with Select “VIDEO CONVERT” Select “FUNCTION” with the the MAIN VIDEO SETUP” from Select “4. This mode both up-converts and down-converts This mode both up-converts and down-converts S-Video, analog video signals (Composite Video, Furthermore, it up-converts Component Video). from analog video signal to HDMI. (It cannot down- convert from HDMI digital video signals to analog video signals.) This mode both up-converts and down-converts S-Video, analog video signals (Composite Video, It does not up-convert to Component Video). HDMI. OFF: all conversion features. This mode turns off ANA&HDMI: ANA ONLY: 2. 3. 4-1 VIDEO CONVERT 4-1 VIDEO signals for video to convert is equipped The SR7001 output. monitor up conversion for explains how to set This section video input. each type of 1. Note: / 1 cursor 2 and 1 , button. 4 , 3 ENTER OK/ ” with the RETURN from the MONITOR OUT 2 terminal are not 2 terminal are not OUT from the MONITOR output. cursor buttons. • video signals converted 1 is selected, When MULTI buttons and press the After you complete this portion of the setup, move After you complete this cursor to “ 2 (This feature is not available on the SR7001.) available feature is not (This to output whether selecting is for This setting the images for for the main room or the images COMPONENT system to the the multi room Select the output 2 terminal. OUT MONITOR with the between MAIN and MULTI destination COMPONENT OUT COMPONENT Note: • ” cursor cursor cursor 4 / 2 ENABLE 3 button. / 1 cursor buttons. ”. EXIT 2

cursor buttons. or 2 1 NEXT OK/ENTER cursor buttons. (refer to or 2 DISABLE cursor buttons and press cursor buttons ”, the SR7001 will display 1 4 / or 3 1 button. ENABLE ” with the AUTO :DISABLE . 4.VIDEO SETUP 4.VIDEO VIDEO CONVERT TV OSD INFO :ENABLE I/P CONVERT :ENABLE HDMI OUT :OUTPUT1 COMPO OUT2 :MAIN RETURN OK/ENTER DISABLE the buttons and press the MENU with the MENU with of HDMI and Component Video. However, OSD OSD However, Video. of HDMI and Component Convert function Video information is output if the video signals to or S-Video Video is used to output Video. Monitor Out of HDMI and Component page 40. For details, refer to“VIDEO CONVERT”on • OSD information is not output to Monitor Output • OSD information is not output to Monitor Output with the Select the desired menu from the MAIN Select “4. VIDEO SETUP” buttons. (refer to page 40) (This feature is not available on the SR7001.) This setting is for selecting which output terminal, HDMI 1 or HDMI 2, to output the signal to. Select the output destination with the Select the IP CONVERT ON/OFF function to to ON/OFF function CONVERT Select the IP enable or disable with the the status of the feature (Volume up/down, input the status of the feature (Volume desire If you do not select, etc..) on the monitor. this information, select “ or “ If you select “ “4-1 VIDEO CONVERT” ON/OFF function to enable AUTO TV Select the or disable with the page 45) Select the OSD information function to “ 4 VIDEO SETUP SETUP 4 VIDEO HDMI OUT HDMI IP CONVERT IP VIDEO CONVERT VIDEO TV-AUTO OSD INFO OSD • • 2. 1. Video settings are made as follows. are made settings Video Note: • • •

ENGLISH 34 “5-2DC TRIGGER SETUP” “5-1MULTI ROOMSETUP” ¥ cursor to“ After youcompletethisportionofthe setup,movethe ¥ buttons andpressthe 2. 1.

5 PREFERENCE MULTI ROOM SETUP: DC TRIGGER SETUP: STAND BY: HDMI AUDIO: BILINGUAL: THROUGH: ENABLE: When thisissetto“ output itthroughthereceivertoa TV orprojector. input totheHDMIjacksthroughSR7001or This settingdetermineswhethertoplaybackaudio 2 select output issettoeither“ In theBilingualmode,DolbyDigitalandDTS unit isintheStandbymode. “ “ Standby mode.When“ the powerconsumptionwhenunitisin BILINGUAL TV AUTO Selectthedesiredmenuwith Select “ cursorbuttons. buttons andpressthe OK with the MAIN / ENTER RETURN 5.PREFERENCE RETURN HDMIAUDIO:ENABLEH BILINGUAL:MAIN STANDBY:NORMAL DCTRIGGERSETUP12 MULTI ROOMSETUP TheaudioinputtotheHDMIjacks ” and“ 5. PREFERENCE 3 The audioinputtotheHDMIjacksis ” withthe ↔ multi channel TV, etc. setting isusedtolistenaudioon a directly tothe TV orprojector. This of theSR7001. Audio dataisoutput not outputfromthespeakerterminals output tothe TV orprojector. In suchcase,audiosignalsarenot can beplayedbackbythisreceiver. or button. SUB RS-232C ” withthe 4 cursorbuttonsandpressthe OK ECONOMY ↔ 1

/ MAIN+SUB ENTER or ECONOMY MAIN OK ” aredisabledwhenthe NEXT 2 3 / cursorbuttons,then ” fromMAINMENU , ENTER (see page36) (see page36) ” or“ 4 button. ”, youcanreduce

, EXIT A 1 B and SUB ” isselected, 3 withthe button. or ”. Select 2 4 cursor cursor 1 or RETURN BACKEXIT AUX1:7.1CH DSS:TUNER VCR1:AUX2 DVD:CD/R TV:TAPE DC TRIG-2: DCTRIGGERSETUP RETURN AUX1:7.1CH DSS:TUNER VCR1:AUX2 DVD:CD/R TV:TAPE DC TRIG-1: DCTRIGGERSETUP TV DISABLE DISABLE NEXT 5.PREFERENCE RETURN HDMIAUDIO:ENABLEH BILINGUAL:MAIN STANDBY:NORMAL DCTRIGGERSETUP12 MULTI ROOMSETUP

EXIT NEXT B feature) with theMULTI ROOMSETUP (The SR7001isnotequipped RETURN BACKEXIT LEV:-90dB: VOL:VARI: MULT:OFFMSPK: MONO/ST:STEREO SLEEP:OFF AUDIO:DVD MULTIROOMSETUPB VIDEO: MULTIROOMSETUPA RETURN BACKEXIT LEV:-90dB: VOL:VARI: MULT:OFFMSPK: MONO/ST:STEREO SLEEP:OFF AUDIO:DVD

EXIT A B DVD 35 ENGLISH

4 or or ” 3 or cursor 3 MULTI MULTI ENTER / 2 ” with the ”, “ OK or REMOTE 1 ” with the EXIT ”, “

cursor buttons. ” from MAIN MENU ” from MAIN 2 button to enter the button to enter the NEXT or RETURN ” with the 1 MAIN ROOM DISABLE OFF ENTER cursor buttons and press the cursor buttons / 4 cursor buttons. MULTI ROOM B ROOM MULTI 2 OK button. ” or “ ” with the or ”, “ 3 ON 5. PREFERENCE 5. DC TRIGGER SETUP 1or 2 DC and TV 1 DC TRIGGER SETUP DC TRIG-1: : TV : TAPE : DVD : CD/R : VCR1 : AUX2 : DSS : TUNER : AUX1 : 7.1CH RETURN , ENTER / 4 cursor button and press the , DISABLE ROOM A ROOM setting) buttons. OK cursor buttons. move the cursor to “ 3 selection. “ with the button. 4 RC8001SR cannot operate the function. selected, voltage is output to the DC TRIGGER TRIGGER selected, voltage is output to the DC output terminal. • The REMOTE is available for the external control. • that is on in the set room is When an input source you complete this portion of the setup, After Select “ Select the Press can select “ You desired input source with the Select Set to “ Select “ Select 7. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1.

ROOM B (The SR7001 does not have a MULTI Note:

5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP TRIGGER 5-2 DC which can jacks, trigger control has 2 DC This unit main room for the input functions to link with be used or multiroom. can be setup separately. Each trigger

Note:

2 2 or 3 or or ” with ” with 1 button. 1 ” with the OFF ” with the OFF ”, the multiroom ” or “ position on the rear ” or “ OK/ENTER ON ON FIXED RETURN OFF ” is in the ” is set to “ ” in the SPEAKER SIZE menu and ” in the SPEAKER SIZE cursor buttons. cursor NONE 2 cursor buttons. VOLUME or 2 cursor buttons and press the SPEAKER C 1 4 output level cannot be adjusted from the A or B or B A adjusted from the output level cannot be room. of the After you complete this portion the same time. setup, move the cursor to “ “ panel. When this setting is unavailable, “***” is is When this setting is unavailable, “***” panel. displayed. set to “ or • and Room B at A MSPK cannot be on for both Room • If “ • If • B is This setting can be changed when the SURR cursor buttons. level with the Adjust the multiroom output set between The volume can be cursor buttons. increments. -90 dB and 0 dB in 1 dB Switch the speaker output “ Switch the speaker 1 multi speaker the multiroom or Select whether with the xed is variable or ﬁ output level the Switch the multiroom output “ output the multiroom Switch LEVEL (VOLUME LEVEL): LEVEL (VOLUME MSPK (MULTI SPEAKER): MSPK (MULTI SETUP): (VOLUME VOL MULTI (MULTI ROOM): (MULTI MULTI Note:

4 or 3 cursor 4 or 3 cursor buttons. The cursor buttons. cursor buttons and cursor buttons and 2 cursor buttons. button to enter the button to enter the 2 4 or button. 1 or or 1 DVD 3 cursor buttons. 2 OK/ENTER cursor buttons. cursor buttons. OK/ENTER 2 2 and or or 1 1 1 MULTI ROOM SETUP A VIDEO : AUDIO :DVD SLEEP :OFF MONO/ST:STEREO MULT:OFF MSPK: VOL :VARI VOL : LEV :-90dB LEV : RETURN BACK EXIT setting. button. MENU with the press the cursor buttons and select either “Room A” or either “Room cursor buttons and select “Room B” with the Select the desired item with the Press the Press ROOM SETUP” with the Select “MULTI the MAIN “5. PREFERENCE” from Select The sleep mode is available when the multiroom is The sleep mode is available when the multiroom active, set the time with sleep timer can be set to a maximum 90 minutes sleep timer can be set to a maximum 90 minutes in 10 minute increments. This mode switches audio output to the multi room and STEREO, system between MONAURAL using the Select the audio source of the multiroom output Select the audio source of the multiroom output with the Select the video source of the multiroom output Select the video source of the multiroom output with the SLEEP: MONO/ST: AUDIO: VIDEO: The following explanation shows how to operate shows how to operate The following explanation of the multi-room system. A ROOM MULTI the ROOM B setting does not have The MULTI VIDEO FUNCTION. ROOM B (The SR7001 does not have a MULTI setting) 4. 3. 2. 1. 5-1 MULTI ROOM SETUP 5-1 MULTI timers and sleep source selectors, has The SR8001 (Room control units remote output multispeaker in the multi room the two other rooms only) for A other room in the SR7001 has only one system. (The system.) multi-room menu. can be set from this These features

ENGLISH 36 • (see page27). measurement resultsofthe AUTO SETUP feature FLAT thatautomaticallyadjusttheequalizerfrom adjust theequalizer, and AUDYSSEY, FRONT and PRESET G.EQthatallowstheusertomanually There are4equalizermodestochoosefrom: EQ MODE: • changing theEqualizermode. This displayisforsettinguptheequalizerand “6-2CHECK AUTO” “6-1PRESET G.EQ ADJ” 2. 1. CHECKAUTO 1&2: PRESETG. EQADJ: 6 ACOUSTIC EQ OFF: PRESET: FLAT: FRONT: AUDYSSEY: The graphicequalizerisnotused. characteristics ofeachspeaker(seepage38). This modeadjuststhegraphicequalizerthat music suchasDolbyDigitalandDTS. all speakers.Itissuitedforplaybackofmultichannel This modeﬂ speaker tothoseofthefrontspeakers. This modematchesthecharacteristicsofeach listening room. environment forthesoundcharacteristicsof of allspeakerssoastocreatethebestlistening This modeadjuststhefrequencycharacteristics Select “ Select “ buttons. OK with the / ENTER RETURN CHECKAUTO PRESETG.EQADJ 6.ACOUSTICEQ. EQ.MODE : 6. ACOUSTIC EQ EQ. MODE attens thefrequencycharacteristicsof 3 or button. 4 cursorbuttonsandpressthe

(see page38) ” withthe NEXT (see page38) OFF ” fromMAINMENU

EXIT 3 or 4 cursor Ｓ cursor to“ After youcompletethisportionofthesetup,move Note: buttons andpressthe 3. Select “ • The equalizerturnsoff whenthePureDirectmode, • • Ifaspeakerthatwasdetermined“NON”in Auto • “AUDYSSEY”, “FRONT”and“FLAT” canbe mode isset. Source Directmode,DolbyHeadphoneor Virtual “FRONT” and“FLAT” modescannotbeselected. Setup ismanuallyturnedon,the“AUDYSSEY”, selected afterexecutingthe AUTO SETUP feature. buttons. “ PRESET RETURN FRONT ” or“ RETURN 16k-20.0 8k-18.5 4k-7.0 2k-5.5 1k+3.5 500+9.0 250-5.0 CH :SR125-2.5 RESET: PRESETADJUST +9 0d ” withthe 63 2 0 k8k 2k 500 125 OFF OK 5 k4 16kHz 4k 1k 250 ”, “ / ALLCH ” withthe ENTER FLAT 3 , 63-15.0 ”, “ 4 button. ,

1 AUDYSSEY 1 and or RETURN CHECKAUTO PRESETG.EQ1ADJ 6.ACOUSTICEQ. EQ.MODE : EXIT 2 2 cursor cursor ”, NEXT OFF RETURN 16k-20.0 8k-18.5 4k-7.0 2k-5.5 1k+3.5 500+9.0 250-5.0 CH:SR 125-2.5 MD: CHECKAUTO +9 0d

63 EXIT 2 0 k8k 2k 500 125 AUDYSSEY 5 k4 16kHz 4k 1k 250 63-15.0

EXIT 37 ENGLISH OK/ ” with cursor cursor

2 4 or or 1 3

RETURN EXIT cursor buttons cursor buttons 4 ” from MAIN MENU ” from MAIN / button to enter the button to enter the 3

” with the 63 0.0 ENTER cursor buttons and press the cursor buttons / 4 OK button. or 250 1k 4k 16kHz cursor buttons and press the AUDYSSEY 3 125 500 2k 8k 4 CHECK AUTO 6. ACOUSTIC EQ ACOUSTIC 6. 63 button to return to the “6. ACOUSTIC button to return to the “6. nished checking, select “ / +9 0dB CH:FL 125 0.0 CH:FL 125 0.0 250 0.0 500 0.0 1k 0.0 2k 0.0 4k 0.0 8k 0.0 16k RETURN CHECK AUTO MD: 3 ENTER / OK EQ” menu. the ENTER selection. with the Preset G. EQ modes. 2 menu. buttons. • The frequency will not be exactly the same as in the • AUTO and FR are not indicated on the CHECK FL Once ﬁ Once Select “ Select “ Select the Press Select the channel to check with the buttons. CH: 2. 4. 1. 3. Select MD (mode) with the

6-2 CHECK AUTO 6-2 CHECK results of the for confirming menus are These measurement equalizer function SETUP AUTO FLAT). FRONT, (AUDYSSEY, Notes: Notes: followed by the desired equalizer (“AUDYSSEY”, followed by the desired equalizer (“AUDYSSEY”, “FRONT”, “FLAT”).

”, 4 or SBR dB in 3 cursor cursor cursor ENTER / 2 +9 2 ”, “ or OK SR or 1 and 1 cursor buttons ”, “ EXIT 2 ” with the –20 FR T ” from MAIN MENU ” from MAIN S ”, “ button to enter the button to enter the and button to enter the button to enter the C

1 , ”, “ 63 0.0 button. 4 , k FL 8 3 ENTER cursor buttons, select the cursor buttons, select the / ET ADJU ENTER cursor buttons and press the cursor buttons / S 2 4 CH OK OK button. or 250 1k 4k 16kHz ”) to adjust with the or ET: 3 125 500 2k 1 OK/ENTER 3 6. ACOUSTIC EQ ACOUSTIC 6. S 6 PRESET G. EQ ADJ PRESET G. cursor buttons. (Note that this can be SL ” with the button to enter the settings. Move cursor 4 +9 0dB RE PRE 0.0 CH :FL 125 0.0 250 0.0 500 0.0 1k 0.0 2k 0.0 4k 0.0 8k 0.0 16k RETURN Resets only the currently displayed Resets only the currently displayed ENTER cursor buttons and press the / channel. or cursor button. ” or “ 2 3 4 selection. with the OK cursor buttons. or RETURN Press the Press Select “ Select Select “ Select SBL channel(s) to be reset to either the currently channel(s) to be reset to either the currently displayed channel (“CH”) or all channels (“ALL”), and press the setting. : Resets all channels. “ALL” “CH” : Using the Select the channel (“ buttons, and adjust the level. “ 0.5 dB increments.) Move to the next frequency with the button to enter the selection. Adjust the level with button to enter the selection. the adjusted to any level between Select the target frequency on the graph with the Select the target frequency on the graph with buttons, and switch to the adjustment mode with buttons, and switch to the adjustment mode the 1 RESET: CH: Frequency: 2. 3. 1.

6-1 PRESET G. EQ ADJ G. EQ 6-1 PRESET graphic set a 9-band you to modes allow These of the 7 channels. for each equalizer and press the to “ After you complete this portion of the setup, press the After you complete this portion of the setup, press OK/ENTER

ENGLISH 38 SELECTING THE SURROUND MODE ADJUSTING THE MAIN VOLUME ADJUSTING THE TONE (BASS & TREBLE) BASIC OPERATION CONTROL (PLAY BACK) Example: AUTO SURROUND VOLUME CH VOL M

M EAK ATT ANALOG SURROUND DIGITAL GHT EQ DIGITAL D1 L C R

AAC PCM LFE

SL S SR ENGLISH D1 DOWN UP D2 SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE OK D2 BAND T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR D3

D3 DISPLAY SPEAKERS D4 Before you can listen to any input media, you must MultEQ A/B

EXIT AUX 1 INPUT LIP.SYNC D4 DIGITAL S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R USE PAGE 3 ﬁ rst select the input source on the SR7001. MIC PREV MUTE D5 USE PAGE 1234 GUIDE D5 MENU EXIT

TEST CH.SEL SURR Example : DVD AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001 1 2 3 CH VOL INPUT SELECTOR 7.1CH ATT SPK-AB CH VOL TUNER CD CD-R MD

PURE DIRECT DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED 7.1CH ATT SPK-AB AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001 SLEEP AUTO SURR DIRECT 4 5 6 DSD TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP INPUT SELECTOR DISP OSD SLEEP Adjust the volume to a comfortable level using 7 8 9 LIGHT PURE DIRECT DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED SURROUND MUL 12 MODE AUTO MULTI SPEAK SLEEP AUTO SURR DIRECT the VOLUME control knob on the front panel or RC8001SR Learning Remote Controller DSD 7.1CH INPUT CLEAR 0 MEMO TV DVD VCR DSS PURE DIRECT THX VOLUME 3 / 4 buttons on the remote. STANDBY

SURROUND MUL POWER ON/OFF PHONES MODE AUTO MULTI SPEA TUNER CD CD-R MD To increase the volume, turn the VOLUME knob

7.1CH INPUT

PURE DIRECT THX TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP STANDBY clockwise or press VOLUME 3 button on the remote, During a listening session you may wish to adjust the MENU

POWER ON/OFF PHONES LIGHT 12 to decrease the volume, turn counterclockwise or Bass and Treble Control to suit your listening tastes TUNER CD CD-R MD RC8001SR Learning Remote Controller TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP press VOLUME 4 button on the remote. or room acoustics.

LIGHT 12Notes: RC8001SR Learning Remote Controller (Using the remote control unit) To select DVD, turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob • The volume can be adjusted within the range of – ∞ To adjust the tone, press the AMP button and press on the front panel or press the DVD button on the to 18 dB, in steps of 1 dB. the > button PAGE3 is displayed. remote two times in a row. After you have selected (Using the SR7001) • However, when the channel level is set as described on To adjust the bass effect, press BASS+ (D2) or DVD, simply turn on the DVD player and play the To select the Auto surround mode during playback, page 32, if the volume for any channel is set at +1 dB BASS– (D3). DVD. press the AUTO button on the front panel. or greater, the volume cannot be adjusted up to 18 dB. (In this case the maximum volume adjustment range To adjust the treble effect, TREB+ (D4) or TREB– (Using the remote control unit) (D5). ¥ As the input source is changed, the new input To select the Auto surround mode, press the AMP is “18 dB - Maximum value of channel level) name will appear momentarily an OSD information button and press the > button until PAGE1 is Notes: on the video display. The input name will also displayed. Press the AUTO (D1) button. • The tone control function is unavailable for the appear in the display, on the front-panel. Source Direct, Pure Direct, Dolby Headphone, ¥ For surround modes, see “Surround Mode” on NIGHT MODE ¥ If you use the FUNCTION RENAME feature (see page 41. Dolby Virtual Speaker THX mode, and 192kHz page 25) , the renamed name appears on the PCM. ¥ To add the THX mode to the Auto Surround mode, M display. press either the THX button on the SR7001 or the • The tone control function is not available when D1 ¥ As the input is changed, the SR7001 will PRESET G.EQ is being used. THX button on the remote control unit. D2 automatically switch to the digital input, surround ¥ To select a speciﬁ c surround mode, Press the D3 mode, attenuation, and night mode status which individual surround mode button on page 1.2 on D4 were entered during the conﬁ guration process for USE PAGE 3 the remote control unit. D5 DIALOGUE NORMALIZATION MESSAGE that source. Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of ¥ When an audio source is selected, the last video CH VOL input used remains routed to the VCR1 & DSS/ Dolby Digital. VCR2 Outputs and Monitor Output. This permits TUNER CD CD-R MD When playing back software which has been TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP simultaneous viewing and listening to different encoded in Dolby Digital, sometimes you may see a LIGHT 12 brief message on the FL display which will read "Dial sources. RC8001SR Learning Remote Controller ¥ When a video source is selected, the selected Norm X dB" (X being a numeric value). video signal is output from the MONITOR OUT Dialogue Normalization serves to let you know if the terminal. (Using the remote control unit) source material has been recorded at a higher or To adjust the tone, press the AMP button and press lower level than usual. For example, if you see the the > button PAGE3 is displayed. following message: "Dial Norm + 4 dB" on the FL Press the NIGHT (D1) button to turn on the Night display, to keep the overall output level constant just mode. Setting the Night mode to “ON” compresses turn down the volume control by 4 dB. In other words, the dynamic range in Dolby Digital only. the source material that you are listening to has been This softens loud passages such as sudden recorded 4 dB louder than usual. explosions, to help prevent disturbing others late at If you do not see a message on the FL display, then night. To turn off the Night mode, Press the NIGHT no adjustment of the volume control is necessary. (D1) button again. 39 ENGLISH VIDEO CONVERT CONNECTION EXAMPLE ¥ When a monitor is connected to the COMPONENT TEMPORARILY TURNING OFF THE SOUND VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001 ¥ When a monitor is connected to the HDMI

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001 ANALOG VIDEO CONVERSION MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001 INPUT SELECTOR VOLUME PURE DIRECT

DSD DOWN UP

SURROUND MULTI MODE AUTO MULTI SPEAKER BAND T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

7.1CH INPUT DISPLAY

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001 SPEAKERS PURE DIRECT THX MultEQ A/B

STANDBY ENTER OK MENU EXIT INPUT SELECTOR VOLUME AUX 1 INPUT DIGITAL S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R POWER ON/OFF PHONES The SR7001 is equipped to convert video signals MIC

PURE DIRECT

DSD DOWN UP

SURROUND MULTI for monitor output. Because of this, indifferent of MODE AUTO MULTI SPEAKER BAND T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR 7.1CH INPUT DISPLAY

SPEAKERS PURE DIRECT THX MultEQ A/B

STANDBY ENTER MENU EXIT AUX 1 INPUT DIGITAL S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R POWER ON/OFF PHONES MIC the connection (VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT VIDEO LIP.SYNC PREV MUTE VIDEO) between the playback device and the component GUIDE VIDEO or S-VIDEO MENU EXIT SR7001, listening and viewing are possible with a TEST CH.SEL SURR or component 1 2 3 single higher grade cable between the MONITOR or S-VIDEO 7.1CH ATT SPK-AB HDMI 4 5 6 OUT terminal of the SR7001 and the monitor. or component DISP OSD SLEEP or HDMI HDMI 7 8 9

UP-CONVERSION FROM ANALOG VIDEO Notes: To temporarily silence all speaker outputs such as SIGNALS TO HDMI when interrupted by a phone call, press the MUTE Notes: • The HDMI video signal input from the playback The up-conversion feature of the SR7001 can output • If the resolution of the component video signal input device is not output from the COMPONENT button on the remote. the input analog video signals (for component video from the playback device is other than 480i/576i, VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001. This will interrupt the output to all speakers and the signals of 480i/576i, 480p/576P, 1080i and 720p 480p/576P, 1080i or 720p, images are not output head-phone jack, but it will not affect any recording from the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the or dubbing that may be in progress. resolution, and S-Video and Video (composite) Notes of OSD menu system: SR8001. When the system is muted, the display will show of 480i/576i resolution) to the HDMI MONITOR • The setup menu can be displayed through all terminal. • If the resolution of the S-Video or Video signal input “MUTE” . from the playback device is other than 480i/576i, video out terminals (“HDMI”, “COMPONENT”, Press the MUTE button again to return to normal “SVIDEO” and “VIDEO”). Notes: images are not output from the HDMI MONITOR operation. • HDMI video input is only output to the HDMI OUT terminal of the SR7001. • OSD information is output only to the VIDEO and MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001. If S-VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals. connecting a playback device such as a DVD ¥ When a monitor is connected to the VIDEO or S- OSD information is also output when the video player to the HDMI input jack, connect the HDMI VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals of the SR7001 conversion feature is on and the video signal input USING THE SLEEP TIMER MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001 to a TV to the VIDEO or S-VIDEO input jack of the SR7001 LIP.SYNC AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001 PREV MUTE INPUT SELECTOR VOLUME

monitor. PURE DIRECT DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B V-OFF PEAK ATT ANALOG SURROUND DIGITAL DIGITAL GUIDE SLEEP AUTO SURR DIRECT DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 NIGHT EQ L C R is converted and output from the COMPONENT AAC PCM LFE SL S SR DSD DOWN UP MENU EXIT

SURROUND MULTI MODE AUTO MULTI SPEAKER BAND T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

7.1CH INPUT DISPLAY TEST CH.SEL SURR SPEAKERS PURE DIRECT THX MultEQ A/B VIDEO or HDMI MONITOR OUT terminals.

STANDBY • This mode is unavailable for the REC out terminal. ENTER MENU EXIT AUX 1 INPUT DIGITAL S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R POWER ON/OFF PHONES MIC 1 2 3 • This mode is unavailable for still picture, fast 7.1CH ATT SPK-AB 4 5 6 forward and reverse play on video component. VIDEO VIDEO DISP OSD SLEEP I/P CONVERT 7 8 9 • If, while attempting to use the video convert feature, THX or S-VIDEO or S-VIDEO CLEAR 0 MEMO the SR7001 cannot synchronize with the display The video circuit of the SR7001 is equipped with an device, “NO SIGNAL” appears on the monitor or or component I/P conversion feature. noise is generated, this feature cannot be used. All of HDMI When this feature is on, 480i/576i analog video these signs are caused by equipment incompatibility; signals (VIDEO, S-VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO) there is nothing wrong with the SR7001. input from a playback device can be converted If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the To program the SR7001 for automatic standby, press VIDEO SETUP DISABLE to 480p/576p and progressively output to the “ ” menu to “ ”. Next, Notes: the SLEEP button on the remote. connect the video input signal to the display component COMPONENT VIDEO or HDMI MONITOR OUT via the MONITOR OUT terminal under VIDEO and • The HDMI video signal input from the playback terminals of the SR7001. Each press of the button will increase the time before the S-video input signal to the display component via device is not output from the VIDEO or S-VIDEO (For setting instructions, see page 34) shut down in the following sequence. the MONITOR OUT terminal under S-VIDEO. MONITOR OUT terminals of the SR7001. • If the resolution of the component video signal input • The video convert feature constantly monitors OFF 10 20 30 40 input video signals and determines whether to from the playback device is other than 480i/576i, it is not output from the VIDEO or S-VIDEO convert the input signals or not. However, some 90 80 70 60 50 input video signals cannot be detected correctly. MONITOR OUT terminals of the SR7001. If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the The sleep time will be shown for a few seconds in the “VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”. display on the front panel, and it will count down until • For optimal video performance, THX recommends the time has elapsed. setting the “VIDEO CONVERT” mode “DISABLE”. When the programmed sleep time has elapsed, the unit will automatically turn off. Note that the SLEEP indicator on the display will illuminate when the Sleep function is programmed. To cancel the Sleep function, press the SLEEP button until the display shows “SLEEP OFF” and the SLEEP indicator will disappear. 40 AUTO Note: 2 MODE SURROUND MODE When this mode is selected, the SR7001/SR8001 • When playing Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded software in 6.1 channels, it is required to select the (Dolby Digital, Pro Logic IIx MOVIE, Pro Logic IIx determines whether the digital input signal is Dolby THX Surround EX mode. MUSIC, Pro Logic IIx GAME) SURROUND Digital, Dolby Digital Surround EX, DTS, DTS-ES, This mode is used with source materials encoded in DTS 96/24 or PCM audio. Dolby Digital and Dolby Surround. ENGLISH The SR7001/SR8001 is equipped with many Surround EX & DTS-ES will operate for multichannel THX SELECT2 CINEMA surround modes. These are provided to reproduce sources that have a Dolby Digital Surround EX or THX SELECT2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using DOLBY DIGITAL a variety of surround sound effects, according to the DTS-ES auto trigger fl ag in the digital signal. content of the source to be played. all 7.1 speakers giving you the best possible movie This mode is enabled when playing source materials When a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input, the watching experience. In this mode, ASA processing encoded in Dolby Digital. The available surround modes may be restricted number of channels for which the corresponding depending on the input signal and speaker setup. blends the surround L/R speakers and surround back Playing multichannel-encoded 5.1 channel Dolby signal is encoded will be played. speakers, providing the optimal mix of ambient and Digital sources provides 5 main audio channels (left, Inputting a Dolby Digital two channel signal with directional surround sound. center, right, surround left and surround right) and a SOURCE DIRECT Dolby surround status automatically subjects that This mode permits the playback of a non Surround Low Frequency Effect channel. signal to Pro Logic IIx movie processing before play. EX/ES-encoded 5.1 movie over a 7.1 system. Dolby Digital EX decoding is not available in this In the Source Direct mode, the tone control circuit PCM 96 kHz source material can be played in this DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby mode. Acoustic EQ. and bass management confi guration mode. Digital Surround EX-encoded soundtracks will be are bypassed for full-range frequency response and Notes: automatically detected, if the appropriate fl ag has Dolby Pro Logic IIx has 5 modes: the purist audio reproduction. • When you use this mode with certain DVD and CD been encoded. Pro Logic IIx MOVIE Notes: players, performing operations such as skip or stop Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround • Speaker size is set to Front L/R = LARGE, Center = may momentarily interrupt the output. are missing the digital fl ag that allows automatic sound from Dolby Surround, encoded stereo movie LARGE, Surround L/R = LARGE and Subwoofer • When the signal is not decoded, the mode is changed switching. soundtracks. = YES automatically. Tone controls, equalizer and to AUTO mode automatically. See page 43 to If you know that the movie that you are watching is Pro Logic IIx MUSIC additional processing are deactivated. confi rm the available decoding modes. encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select the This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround • When you use this mode with certain DVD and CD THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise the THX sound from conventional stereo sources (analog or players, performing operations such as skip or stop THX CINEMA SELECT2 Cinema mode will apply ASA processing to digital), such as CD, tape, FM, TV, stereo VCR, etc. may momentarily interrupt the output. provide optimum replay. Pro Logic IIx GAME THX Cinema mode applies additional processing This mode restores the impact low-frequency to Dolby Digital, DTS and Dolby Pro Logic multi- PURE DIRECT THX MUSIC surround effects by routing them to the system’s channel, surround sources. The THX processing subwoofer. The Pure Direct mode further reduces sources of was developed by Lucasfi lm Ltd. to recreate the For the replay of multichannel music, the THX Music 5.1ch + Pro Logic IIx Movie noise in addition to effect of the Source Direct mode, sound of top-quality theater. mode should be selected. In this mode, THX ASA This mode provides 7.1 channel surround sound from by blocking output from the video jacks (VIDEO, Use the THX Cinema mode for all movies on disc, processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 channel sources movie soundtracks. S-VIDEO, COMPONENT VIDEO and HDMI) and tape or broadcast. In this mode, the THX Surround 5.1-encoded music sources, such as DTS and Dolby 5.1ch + Pro Logic IIx Music turning the FL display off. EX mode is not available. Digital, to provide a wide, stable, rear soundstage. This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround sound This mode is to be used with multichannel music from 5.1 channel sources music soundtracks. THX SURROUND EX sources such as DTS 5.1 music and Dolby Digital Notes: 5.1 music. In a movie theater, fi lm soundtracks that have been • Pro Logic IIx mode will decode as Pro Logic II Notes: encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology mode when the SURR. B is set to “NONE” from SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See page 30) are able to reproduce an extra channel which has • These modes are only available when you have setup SPEAKER SIZE menu system (i.e. 2 surround been added during the mixing of the program. • Pro Logic IIx mode is available for a 2 channel input back speakers). This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds signal which is encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD or PCM format. behind the listener in addition to the currently • These modes are only available when the input signal has surround left and surround right contents. available front left, front center, front right, surround • PCM audio signals can be subjected to Pro Logic IIx right, surround left and subwoofer channels. processing when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. This additional channel provides the opportunity THX GAMES for more detailed imaging behind the listener and For the replay of stereo and multichannel game brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound audio the THX Games mode should be selected. localization than ever before. In this mode, THX ASA processing is applied to THX Surround EX will operate for any 5.1 channel the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0-encoded source whenever THX is active. game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and THX Surround EX is not available in system without Dolby Digital. This accurately places all game audio surround back speaker(s). surround information, providing a full 360-degree playback environment. THX Games mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround fi eld. 41 ENGLISH EX/ES Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music STEREO Note for HDCD This mode decodes 2 channel signals into 6 channel ¥ HDCD is effective only through digital input. This mode provides 6.1 channel surround for Dolby This mode bypasses all surround processing. signals using high-accuracy digital matrix technology. Digital EX, and DTS-ES-encoded source material In stereo program sources, the left and right channels ¥ You may not be able to play some HDCD source The DTS Neo:6 decoder has near-discrete properties such as DVD. play normally when PCM audio or analog stereo is signals from certain CD players if you connect in the frequency characteristics of the channels as the player to the SR7001/SR8001 digitally. This This mode cannot be used when an analog input has input. well as in channel separation. is because the digital signal has been processed been selected. With Dolby Digital and DTS sources, the 5.1 channels According to the signals to be played back, DTS Neo:6 (such as the output level, sampling frequency or are converted to two channel stereo. 96 kHz PCM uses either the Neo:6 Cinema mode optimized for frequency response) and the SR7001/SR8001 Dolby Digital EX source material can be played back in stereo mode. movie playback or the Neo:6 Music mode optimized cannot recognize the signal as HDCD data. In a movie theater, fi lm soundtracks that have been for music playback. encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology CAUTION are able to reproduce an extra channel which has Notes: been added during the mixing of the program. • The Neo:6 mode is available for 2 channel input Note for DTS This channel, called surround back, places sounds signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD ¥ To connected DVD player, laserdisc player or CD behind the listener in addition to the currently or PCM format. player needs to support DTS digital output. You available front left, front center, front right, surround • PCM audio signals can be subjected to Neo:6 may not be able to play some DTS source signals right, surround left and subwoofer channels. processing when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz, from certain CD players and LD players even if This additional channel provides the opportunity 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. you connect the player to the SR7001/SR8001 for more detailed imaging behind the listener and digitally. This is because the digital signal has been brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound MULTI CH. ST processed (such as the output level, sampling localization than ever before. frequency or frequency response), and the SR7001/ Dolby Digital EX is not available in systems that do This mode is used to create a wider, deeper and more SR8001 cannot recognize the signal as DTS data. not have without surround back speaker(s). natural soundstage from two channel source material. ¥ Depending on the player used, DTS play may This is done by feeding the left channel signal to produce a short noise. This is not a malfunction. both the left front and left surround speakers and the DTS-ES (Discrete 6.1, Matrix 6.1) ¥ While signals from a DTS laserdisc or CD are right channel signal to both the right front and right DTS-ES adds the surround center channel audio to playing in another surround mode, you cannot surround speakers. Additionally, the center channel the DTS 5.1 channel format to improve the acoustic switch to digital input or from digital input to analog positioning, and makes acoustic image movement reproduces a mix of the right and left channels. input from the INPUT SETUP in the MAIN MENU more natural with the 6.1 channel reproduction. or by pressing the A/D button. The SR7001/SR8001 incorporates a DTS-ES- CIRCLE SURROUND II ¥ You can not listen to DTS-encoded software in a decoder, which can handle DTS-ES Discrete- (CSII-CINEMA, CSII-MUSIC, CSII-MONO) multiroom. encoded and DTS-ES Matrix-encoded program Circle Surround is designed to enable multichannel ¥ The outputs for VCR 1 OUT, DSS/VCR 2 OUT, sources from DVD, etc. surround sound playback of non-encoded and TAPE OUT and CD-R OUT output analog audio DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 features digital discrete multichannel encoded material. signals only. Do not record from CDs or LDs that recording of all channels, including the surround back Backward compatibility provides listeners with up to support DTS using these outputs. If you do, the channel(s), and higher quality audio reproduction. 6.1 channels of surround performance from an entire DTS-encoded signal will be recorded as noise. DTS-ES is not available in systems that do not have collection of music and fi lm, including broadcast, surround back speakers. Note or Dolby Digital Surround EX videotape and stereo recorded music. ¥ When playing Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded Depending on source material, you can select CSII- software in 6.1 channels, it is required to set the dts Cinema mode, CSII-Music mode or CSII-Mono EX/ES mode. dts, Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music mode. ¥ Note that some Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded This mode is for DTS-encoded source materials Notes: software does not contain the identifi cation signal. such as laserdisc, CD and DVD. Neo:6 is for some 2 • The CS II mode is available for 2 channel input In this case, set the EX/ES mode manually. channel sources. signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD Note for 96 kHz/192 kHz PCM audio or PCM format. ¥ The AUTO, Pure Direct, and Stereo modes can be dts • PCM audio signals can be subjected to CS II used when playing PCM signals with a sampling This mode is enabled when playing source materials processing when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz, frequency of 96/192 kHz (such as from DVD-Video/ encoded in dts multichannel. 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. Audio discs). Playing multichannel encoded-5.1 channel dts ¥ Certain DVD player models inhibit digital output. For sources provides five main audio channels (left, Dolby Virtual Speaker details, refer to the player’s operation manual. center, right, surround left and surround right) and a Low Frequency Effects channel. Dolby Virtual Speaker technology uses proprietary ¥ Some DVD discs feature copy protection. When using dts-ES decoding is not available in this mode. technology of Dolby Laboratories to create a virtual such disc, 96 kHz PCM signal are not output from the The DTS mode cannot be used when an analog surround sound fi eld using only two speakers for the DVD player. For details, refer to the player’s operation manual. input has been selected. front channels, allowing the user to experience sound as if surround speakers were actually being used. 42 The relationship between the selected surround Output Channel Front information display Surround Mode Input Signal Decoding SL SBL L/R C SubW Signal format indicators Channel status mode and the input signal SR SBR The surround mode is selected with the surround AUTO Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX OOOOO2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE mode selector on the SR7001 or the remote control Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 OOO- O 2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Dolby D (2ch) Dolby Digital 2.0 O ---O 2 DIGITAL L, R unit. However, the sound you hear is subject to the Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic IIx movie OOOOO2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S relationship between the selected surround mode DTS-ES DTS-ES OOOOOdts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE ENGLISH DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24 OOO- O dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE and the input signal. That relationship is as follows: DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1 OOO- O dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM OOO- O M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz OOO- O M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM OOO- O SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD (2ch) PCM (Stereo) O ---O SA-CD L, R PCM (Audio) PCM (Stereo) O ---O PCM L, R PCM 96kHz PCM (Stereo 96kHz) O ---O PCM L, R HDCD HDCD O ---O PCM, HDCD L, R Analog Stereo O ---O ANALOG - 7.1ch input Multi Ch OOOOOANALOG - SOURCE DIRECT Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX OOOOO2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE PURE DIRECT Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 OOO- O 2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Dolby D (2ch) Dolby Digital 2.0 O ---O 2 DIGITAL L, R Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic IIx movie OOOOO2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S DTS-ES DTS-ES OOOOOdts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24 OOO- O dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1 OOO- O dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM OOO- O M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz OOO- O M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD (5.1ch) SA-CD (5.1ch) OOO- O SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD (2ch) SA-CD (2ch) O ---O SA-CD L, R PCM (Audio) PCM (Stereo) O ----PCM L, R PCM 96kHz PCM (Stereo 96kHz) O ----PCM L, R HDCD HDCD O - - - - PCM, HDCD L, R Analog Stereo O ----ANALOG - 7.1ch input Multi Ch OOOOOANALOG - EX/ES Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX OOOOO2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital EX OOOOO2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DTS-ES DTS-ES OOOOOdts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE DTS (5.1ch) DTS-ES OOOOOdts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Multi-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + Dolby EX OOOOOM-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + Dolby EX OOOOOSA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DOLBY Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital 5.1 OOO- O 2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (PLIIx movie) Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 OOO- O 2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (PLIIx music) Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 + PLIIx OOOOO2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (PLIIx game) Dolby D (2ch) Pro Logic IIx OOOOO2 DIGITAL L, R Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic IIx OOOOO2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + PLIIx OOOOOM-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + PLIIx OOOOOSA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD (2ch) Pro Logic IIx OOOOOSA-CD L, R PCM (Audio) Pro Logic IIx OOOOOPCM L, R HDCD Pro Logic IIx OOOOOPCM, HDCD L, R Analog Pro Logic IIx OOOOOANALOG - DTS DTS-ES DTS 5.1 OOO- O dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (Neo:6 Cinema) DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24 OOO- O dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (Neo:6 Music) DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1 OOO- O dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Dolby D (2ch) Neo:6 OOOOO2 DIGITAL L, R Dolby D (2ch Surr) Neo:6 OOOOO2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S SA-CD (2ch) Neo:6 OOOOOSA-CD L, R PCM(Audio) Neo:6 OOOOOPCM L, R HDCD Neo:6 OOOOOPCM, HDCD L, R Analog Neo:6 OOOOOANALOG - CSII Cinema Dolby D (2ch) CSII OOOOO2 DIGITAL L, R CSII Music Dolby D (2ch Surr) CSII OOOOO2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S CSII Mono SA-CD (2ch) CSII OOOOOSA-CD L, R PCM(Audio) CSII OOOOOPCM L, R HDCD CSII OOOOOPCM, HDCD L, R Analog CSII OOOOOANALOG - STEREO Dolby Surr.EX Stereo O ---O 2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE Dolby D (5.1ch) Stereo O ---O 2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Dolby D (2ch) Stereo O ---O 2 DIGITAL L, R Dolby D (2ch Surr) Stereo O ---O 2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S DTS-ES Stereo O ---O dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE DTS 96/24 Stereo O ---O dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DTS (5.1ch) Stereo O ---O dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Multi Ch-PCM Stereo O ---O M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz Stereo O ---O M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD (5.1ch) Stereo O ---O SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD (2ch) Stereo O ---O SA-CD L, R PCM (Audio) Stereo O ---O PCM L, R PCM 96kHz Stereo O ---O PCM L, R HDCD Stereo O ---O PCM, HDCD L, R Analog Stereo O ---O ANALOG -

43 ENGLISH Output Channel Front information display Notes: Surround Mode Input Signal Decoding SL SBL L/R C SubW Signal format indicators Channel status SR SBR • Dolby Digital (2 channel L/R): Speakers for signal Dolby Virtual Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Virtual Speaker O ----2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE with Dolby Surround are fully equipped. Speaker Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker O ----2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Dolby D (2ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker O ----2 DIGITAL L, R • No sound is outputs from the surround speaker, Dolby D (2ch Surr) Dolby Virtual Speaker O ----2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S center speaker and subwoofer if the DVD disc has DTS-ES Dolby Virtual Speaker O - - - - dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE DTS 96/24 Dolby Virtual Speaker O - - - - dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE no surround data. DTS (5.1ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker O - - - - dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Multi Ch-PCM Dolby Virtual Speaker O - - - - M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD (5.1ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker O - - - - SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD (2ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker O ----SA-CD L, R PCM (Audio) Dolby Virtual Speaker O ----PCM L, R Abbreviations HDCD Dolby Virtual Speaker O - - - - PCM, HDCD L, R L/R : Front speakers Analog Dolby Virtual Speaker O ----ANALOG - Multi Ch. Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX OOOOO2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE C : Center speaker Stereo Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 OOO- O 2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SL/SR : Surround speakers Dolby D (2ch) Multi Channel Stereo OOOOO2 DIGITAL L, R Dolby D (2ch Surr) Multi Channel Stereo OOOOO2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S SBL/SBR : Surround back speakers DTS-ES DTS-ES OOOOOdts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE SubW : Subwoofer DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24 OOO- O dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1 OOO- O dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM OOO- O M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz OOO- O M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM OOO- O SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD (2ch) Multi Channel Stereo OOOOOSA-CD L, R PCM (Audio) Multi Channel Stereo OOOOOPCM L, R HDCD Multi Channel Stereo OOOOOPCM, HDCD L, R Analog Multi Channel Stereo OOOOOANALOG - Dolby H.P Dolby Surr.EX Dolby H.P O ----2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby H.P O ----2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Dolby D (2ch) Dolby H.P O ----2 DIGITAL L, R Dolby D (2ch Surr) Dolby H.P O ----2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S DTS-ES Dolby H.P O - - - - dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE DTS 96/24 Dolby H.P O - - - - dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DTS (5.1ch) Dolby H.P O - - - - dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Multi Ch-PCM Dolby H.P O - - - - M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD (5.1ch) Dolby H.P O - - - - SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD (2ch) Dolby H.P O ----SA-CD L, R PCM (Audio) Dolby H.P O ----PCM L, R HDCD Dolby H.P O - - - - PCM, HDCD L, R Analog Dolby H.P O ----ANALOG - THX Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital + THX Surround EX OOOOO2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (THX Games) Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1+ THX 5.1 OOO- O 2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Dolby D (2ch) Pro Logic IIx movie + THX OOOOO2 DIGITAL L, R Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic IIx movie + THX OOOOO2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S DTS-ES DTS-ES + THX OOOOOdts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE DTS (5.1ch) DTS + THX 5.1 OOO- O dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + THX5.1 OOO- O M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + THX5.1 OOO- O SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD (2ch) Pro Logic IIx movie + THX OOOOOSA-CD L, R PCM (Audio) Pro Logic IIx movie + THX OOOOOPCM L, R HDCD Pro Logic IIx movie + THX OOOOOPCM, HDCD L, R Analog Pro Logic IIx movie + THX OOOOOANALOG - THX Select2 Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital + THX Surround EX OOOOO2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE (THX EX) Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1+ THX Select2 Cinema OOOOO2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE (THX Music) Dolby D (2ch) Pro Logic IIx movie + THX OOOOO2 DIGITAL L, R (THX Games) Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic IIx movie + THX OOOOO2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S DTS-ES DTS-ES + THX OOOOOdts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE DTS (5.1ch) DTS + THX Select2 Cinema OOOOOdts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + THX Select2 Cinema OOOOOM-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + THX Select2 Cinema OOOOOSA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE SA-CD (2ch) Pro Logic IIx movie + THX OOOOOSA-CD L, R PCM (Audio) Pro Logic IIx movie + THX OOOOOPCM L, R HDCD Pro Logic IIx movie + THX OOOOOPCM, HDCD L, R Analog Pro Logic IIx movie + THX OOOOOANALOG -

44 OTHER FUNCTION ATTENUATION TO ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL DOLBY HEADPHONE MODE VIDEO ON/OFF This feature simulates the waveforms of the actual When no video signal is connected to the SR7001

LIP.SYNC PREV MUTE sounds heard from the speakers. or a DVD, etc., is connected directly to your TV, TV AUTO ON/OFF FUNCTION GUIDE MENU EXIT When headphones are used, the MENU button the unnecessary video circuit can be turned off by TEST CH.SEL SURR This function allows the component connected to the 1 2 3 automatically switches to the Dolby headphone selecting the “VIDEO OFF” setting. ENGLISH 7.1CH ATT SPK-AB TV-VIDEO in jack to control the power (ON/OFF) to 4 5 6 mode. To select video off, press the AMP button and press DISP OSD SLEEP the SR7001. 7 8 9 The OSD that appears when the MENU button is the > button until PAGE 4 is displayed. Press the THX CLEAR 0 MEMO pressed is shown below. V-OFF button.

AUTO POWER ON HEAD PHONE M

D1 DOLBY HP MODE : DH UND RECEIVER SR8001 1. Be sure the TV auto mode is ENABLED. (Refer If the selected analog audio input signal is greater SURROUND : PLII D2 CINEMA D3 PURE DIRECT DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B V-OFF PEAK ATT ANALOG SURROUND DIGITAL SLEEP AUTO SURR DIRECT DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 NIGHT EQ DIGITAL to page 34: PREFERENCE) than the capable level of internal processing, the L C R AAC PCM LFE SL S SR L LEVEL : +10dB DSD D4

“PEAK” indicator will light up on the front display. If USE PAGE 4 Connect your TV TUNER (etc) to the TV- R LEVEL : 0dB D5 SURROUND MULTI 2. MODE AUTO MULTI SPEAKER BAND T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR this happens, you should press the ATT button on VIDEO in terminal. Be sure to connect the 7.1CH INPUT DISPLAY SPEAKERS PURE DIRECT THX MultEQ A/B

ENTER the remote. MENU EXIT

ONES VIDEO input. MIC “ATT” indicator will be illuminated when this function CH VOL 3. Turn OFF the power to the TV TUNER and the is activated. The signal-input level is reduced by TUNER CD CD-R MD SR7001. about half. Attenuation will not work with the output TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP LIGHT DOLBY HP (Headphone) MODE can be selected 12 signal of TAPE-OUT, CD/CD-R, VCR1-OUT and RC8001SR 4. Turn ON the TV TUNER and tune in a receivable with the left and right cursor buttons. Learning Remote Controller DSS/VCR2-OUT. station. BYPASS → DH (DOLBY Headphone) → BYPASS This function is memorized for each individual input When the station is received, the SR7001 turns 5. source. ON and TV is selected automatically. BYPASS: Bypasses the Dolby headphone mode and delivers ordinary 2-channel stereo. DH: Dolby Headphone is a signal processing AUTO POWER OFF LISTENING THROUGH HEADPHONES system that delivers a sound similar to room speakers. In the above situation, turn the TV TUNER OFF 1. This jack may be used to listen to the SR7001’s It makes it possible to experience or select a channel that does not contain any output through a pair of headphones. Be certain that the volume and space of a 5-channel broadcast. the headphones have a standard 1/4” stereo phono surround system using ordinary stereo 2. The power to the SR7001 switches to STANDBY plug. (Note that the speakers will automatically be headphones. turned off when the headphone jack is in use.) after approx. 5 minutes. When the PURE DIRECT mode is selected, Dolby

Notes: AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001 surround processing is bypassed and “✽✽✽” is

INPUT SELECTOR • AUTO POWER OFF is canceled if the SR7001 is displayed as the mode indication. PURE DIRECT DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SP

SLEEP AUTO SURR DIRECT DISC 6.1

set to a source other than TV. DSD The surround mode can be selected when the

SURROUND MULTI modes in DH is selected. The function reactivates when TV is selected again. MODE AUTO MULTI SPEAKER

7.1CH INPUT

PURE DIRECT THX • Some TV broadcasts may cause the TV AUTO STANDBY L/R LEVEL can be set in the ±12 dB range. MENU

POWER ON/OFF PHONES FUNCTION to turn ON. Notes: • The S-Video terminal does not support “TV AUTO • The surround mode returns to the previous setting as ON/OFF” function. soon as the plug is removed from the jack. • TONE cannot be set when the mode in DH is Note: selected. • The surround mode returns to the previous setting as • The Dolby Headphone function will not work when soon as the plug is removed from the jack. 32 or 96 kHz PCM digital signals are input.

45 ENGLISH DISPLAY MODE SELECTING ANALOG AUDIO INPUT OR RECORDING AN ANALOG SOURCE Recording the video from one source and DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT the audio from another In normal operation, the audio or video source You can add the sound from one source to the AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001 video of another source to make your own video LIP.SYNC selected for listening through the SR7001 is sent to PREV MUTE M GUIDE recordings. PURE DIRECT DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B V-OFF PEAK ATT ANALOG SURROUND the record outputs. DIGITAL SLEEP AUTO SURR DIRECT DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 NIGHT EQ DIGITAL MENU EXIT D1 L C R AAC PCM LFE SL S SR DSD TEST CH.SEL SURR This means that any program you are watching Below is an example of recording the sound from 1 2 3 D2

SURROUND MULTI 7.1CH ATT SPK-AB MODE AUTO MULTISPEAKER BAND T-MODE MEMORY a compact disc player connected to CD IN and the D3 or listening to may be recorded simply by placing 4 5 6 7.1CH INPUT DISPLAY

S DISP OSD SLEEP PURE DIRECT THX MultEQ D4 machines connected to the outputs for TAPE OUT, video from a video camera connected to VCR1 to

ENTER MENU EXIT 7 8 9 PHONES USE PAGE 4 MIC THX D5 CD/CDR OUT, VCR1 OUT, and DSS/VCR2 OUT in video cassette recorder connected to the DSS/VCR2 CLEAR 0 MEMO the record mode. OUT jack.

CH VOL

TUNER CD CD-R MD To record the input source signal you are currently TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP watching or listening to LIGHT TV DVD VCR DSS You can select the display mode for the front display 12 2. RC8001SR TUNER CD CD-R MD of the SR7001. Learning Remote Controller 1. To select this mode, press the DISPLAY on the TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP LIGHT 12 AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001 remote control or the front panel. 1. RC8001SR If you have already assigned the digital inputs, you INPUT SELECTOR Learning Remote Controller

When this button is pressed, the display mode is PURE DIRECT DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED can temporarily select the audio input mode for each SLEEP AUTO SURR DIRECT switched in the following sequence. input source as following procedures. DSD TV DVD VCR DSS

SURROUND MULTI Input Mode → Surround Mode → Auto display OFF Press the AMP button and press the > button until MODE AUTO MULTI SPEAKE 1. Switch the video output source to VCR1 by 7.1CH INPUT TUNER CD CD-R MD

PURE DIRECT THX → Display OFF → Normal Mode → Input Mode STANDBY 1. simply pressing the input selector buttons on PAGE4 is displayed. Press the A/D (D3) button. MENU TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP POWER ON/OFF PHONES

When this button is pressed, the input mode is LIGHT the remote. 12 Normal Mode: RC8001SR switched in the following sequence. Learning Remote Controller 2. Switch the audio input source to CD by simply Displays the selected input function. If the function Auto → HDMI → Digital → Analog → Auto has been renamed using the Function Rename pressing the input selector buttons on the feature (see page 25), the renamed name appears Auto mode: remote. The types of signals being input to the digital and 1. Select the input source to record by turning the on the display. Now “CD” has been selected as the audio input analog input jacks for the selected input source are INPUT FUNCTION SELECTOR knob on the 3. Input Mode: detected automatically. front panel or simply press the input selector source and “VCR1” as the video input source. Displays the input mode set via the Function Input If no digital signal is being input, the analog input buttons on the remote. Notes: Setup feature (see page 24). jacks are selected automatically. The input source is now selected and you may • If you change the input source during recording, you Surround Mode: HDMI mode: watch or listen to it as desired. will record the signals from the newly selected input Displays the status of the selected surround HDMI mode can be selected only when an HDMI source. The currently selected input source signal mode. input has been assigned as an input source. 2. • You cannot record the surround effects. Auto Display Off mode: When “HDMI AUDIO” under PREFERENCE of the is output to the TAPE OUT, CD/CDR OUT, • Digital input signals are only output to the digital The display is off. But, if you make a change to SETUP MENU is set to “THROUGH”, the HDMI VCR1 OUT, and DSS/VCR2 OUT outputs for mode cannot be selected. outputs. There is no conversion from digital to the unit such as the input or surround mode, the recording. analog . Digital mode: display will show that change, then go back to Start recording to the recording component as off after about 3 seconds. When changing the The input signal is ﬁ xed to an assigned digital input 3. When connecting CD players and other digital desired. volume, it is not displayed. terminal. components, do not connect only the digital terminals, but the analog ones as well. Display Off mode: Analog mode: The display is off completely. The analog input jacks are selected. Note: This selection is temporary and will not be stored in • Only the DISP indicator will be illuminated on the memory. front display in display off condition. To store changes to the input mode, select “1. INPUT SETUP” from the MAIN MENU. (See page 24)

46 SPEAKER A/B To cancel the 7.1 CH. INPUT setting, press the 7.1 LIP.SYNC 1. 2. CH INPUT button on the front panel or press 7.1 CH on the remote. Depending on the image device (TV, monitor,

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

VOLUME LIP.SYNC INPUT SELECTOR projector, etc.) connected to the SR7001, a time lag PREV MUTE Notes: GUIDE

ULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B V-OFF PEAK ATT ANALOG SURROUND PURE DIRECT DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A can occur between image signal processing and DIGITAL AUTO SURR DIRECT DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 NIGHT EQ DIGITAL MENU EXIT SLEEP AUTO SURR DIRECT DISC 6.1 L C R LFE • When the 7.1 CH. Input is in use, you may not select AAC PCM SL S SR TEST CH.SEL SURR ENGLISH DSD DOWN audio signal processing. Though minor, this time 1 2 3 a surround mode, as the external decoder determines 7.1CH ATT SPK-AB MULTI SURROUND MULTI MULTI SPEAKER BAND T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR MODE AUTO MULTI SPEAKER lag can interfere with movie and music enjoyment. 4 5 6 processing.

7.1CH INPUT DISPLAY DISP OSD SLEEP 7.1CH INPUT SPEAKERS CH VOL MultEQ A/B PURE DIRECT THX The LIP.SYNC feature delays the audio signal with ENTER STANDBY 7 8 9 E MENU EXIT AUX 1 INPUT MENU • In addition, there is no signal at the record outputs DIGITAL S-VIDEO VIDEO MIC THX POWER ON/OFF PHONES respect to the image signal output from the SR7001 CLEAR 0 MEMO 4. when the 7.1 CH. Input is in use.

OK to correct the time lag between the sound and image. It can be operated with the “LIP.SYNC” and 1 and 4. 2 cursor buttons of the remote controller. Set the LIP.SYNC PREV MUTE SR7001 has speaker system - A and speaker GUIDE AUX2 INPUT remote controller to the AMP mode before operating 4. MENU EXIT system- B for front L/R channels. TEST CH.SEL SURR the LIP.SYNC feature. The initial setting is OFF (0 1 2 3 If you don’t need to connect 7.1 Ch. input terminals You can select these systems by pressing 3. 7.1CH ATT SPK-AB ms).The time lag can be adjusted in 10 ms steps up 4 5 6 VOLUME with multi channel decoder, SPEAKERS A/B button on the front panel or SPK- DISP OSD SLEEP to 200 ms.

SURROUND 7 8 9 L(front left) and R (front right) inputs terminals are DIGITAL L C R Watch the picture on the image device (i.e., TV, 2. THX AB on the remote. LFE M SL S SR DOWN UP CLEAR 0 MEMO available as AUX2 input. monitor, projector, etc.) as you adjust the time lag.

ODE MEMORY CLEAR In this case, You can connect additional audio source Note: SPEAKERS MultEQ A/B to AUX2 as other audio input terminals.

AUX 1 INPUT DIGITAL S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R 7.1 CH INPUT MIC • The LIP.SYSNC feature turns OFF (0 ms) in AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001 the SOURCE/PURE DIRECT mode. When the INPUT SELECTOR The SR7001 is equipped for future expansion SOURCE/PURE DIRECT mode is deactivated, the PURE DIRECT DISP MULTI AUTO SLEEP AUTO SURR set value of the LIP.SYSNC feature is automatically through the use of Multi channel Super Audio CD DSD restored. multichannel player or DVD-Audio player. SURROUND MODE AUTO MULTI

When this is selected, the input signals connected to 1. Select a desired Video source to decide the 7.1CH I PURE DIRECT THX

STANDBY routed video signal to the Monitor Outputs. MEN CH VOL the L(front left), R (front right), CENTER, SL (surround POWER ON/OFF PHONES left), SR (surround right) and SBL (surround back left) 2. Press the 7.1 CH INPUT button on the front and SBR (surround back right) channels of the 7.1 panel or press 7.1 CH on the remote to switch OK CH. In jacks are output directly to the front (left and the 7.1 channel input. right), center, surround (left and right) and surround LIP.SYNC 3. If it is necessary to adjust the output level of PREV MUTE back speaker systems as well as the pre-out jacks GUIDE each channel, press the CH.SEL button on the MENU EXIT without passing through the surround circuitry. TEST CH.SEL SURR remote. 1 2 3 In addition, the signal input to the SW (subwoofer) 7.1CH ATT SPK-AB 4 5 6 jack is output to the PRE OUT SW (subwoofer) jack. Adjust the speaker output levels so that you can DISP OSD SLEEP 7 8 9 When 7.1 CH. INPUT is selected, the last video input hear the same sound level from each speaker THX used remains routed to the Monitor Outputs. at the listening position. For the front left, front CLEAR 0 MEMO This permits simultaneous viewing with video right, center, surround left, surround right and sources surround back speakers, the output levels can be adjusted between Ð12 to +12 dB. The subwoofer can be adjusted between Ð18 and +12 dB. These adjustments result will be stored to 7.1 CH. INPUT memory. 4. Adjust the main volume with the MAIN VOLUME knob or the VOL buttons on the remote.

47 ENGLISH SOURCE (Using the SR7001) To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice M 1. BASIC OPERATION 5. within two seconds on the remote. 1. Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select D1 (TUNER) “TUNER”. 3. 2. D2 2. Press the > button until PAGE 1 isdisplayed. D3 Press the BAND button to select either FM or 5. Press the BAND (D5) button to select either 2. D4 3.

To operate the unit from the remote control, press USE PAGE 2 AM. D5 FM or AM.

the TUNER button on the remote control so that the PURE DIRECT DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B V-OFF PEAK ATT ANALOG SURROUND 4. DIGITAL SLEEP AUTO SURR DIRECT DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 NIGHT EQ DIGITAL L C R

AAC PCM LFE Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front SL S SR tuner mode is engaged. 3. DSD 4. Press the GUIDE on the remote, display will Panel for more than 1 second to start the auto SURROUND MULTI show “FREQ----”. TV DVD VCR DSS MODE AUTO MULTI SPEAKER BAND T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

7.1CH INPUT DISPLAY tuning function. TUNER CD CD-R MD SPEAKERS PURE DIRECT THX MultEQ A/B lnput your desired station’s, frequency with the ENTER MENU EXIT 5. TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP LISTENING TO THE TUNER MIC 4. Automatic searching begins then stops when a 1. ten numbered keypad on the remote. LIGHT station is tuned in. 12 RC8500SR Frequency scan step for AM is selectable. Learning Remote Controller 6. The desired station will automatically be tuned. Default setup is 10 kHz step, if your country’s standard is 9 kHz step, Press BAND button on the (Using the remote control unit) (FM) TUNING MODE (AUTO STEREO OR MONO) front panel or TUNER button on the remote more To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice than 5 seconds. Scan step will change. 1. (Using the SR7001) M within two second on the remote. D1 Note: Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select D2 2. Press the > button until PAGE 1 is displayed. 1. • Preset memory for the tuner will clear by changing “TUNER”. D3 this setup. 3. Press the BAND (D5) button to select either D4

Press the BAND button to select either FM or USE 2. PAGE 1 FM or AM. D5 AM. VOLUME

V-OFF PEAK ATT ANALOG SURROUND DIGITAL AUTO TUNING Press the > button until PAGE 2 is displayed. 6.1 NIGHT EQ DIGITAL L C R 4. LFE AAC PCM Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front SL S SR 3. DOWN UP CH VOL SOURCE 5. Press and hold the SCAN+ (D1) or SCAN– (D2) Panel to select the desired station. BAND T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR TV DVD VCR DSS M button for 1 second or more. DISPLAY SPEAKERS MultEQ A/B TUNER CD CD-R MD

D1 R EXIT AUX 1 INPUT DIGITAL S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R Automatic searching begins then stops when a MIC TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP D2 6. (Using the remote control unit) LIGHT 12 D3 station is tuned in.

RC8500SR To select tuner, press the TUNER button twice Learning Remote Controller 1. D4 1.

USE PAGE 2 3. within two seconds on the remote. D5 If tuning does not stop at the desired station, use to AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001 the “Manualtunin” operation. INPUT SELECTOR 2. Press the > button until PAGE 1 is displayed.

CH VOL PURE DIRECT DISP MULTI 2. When in the auto stereo mode, AUTO indicator will SLEEP AUTO S 3. Press the BAND (D5) button to select either DSD MANUAL TUNING FM or AM. be illuminated on the display.

SURROUND TV DVD VCR DSS MODE AUTO MU The “ST” indicator is illuminated when a stereo

TUNER CD CD-R MD Press the > button until PAGE 2 is displayed. D2 PURE DIRECT THX 4. broadcast is tuned in. STANDBY POWER ON/OFF PHONES TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP 1. D3 5. Press the SCAN+ (D1) or SCAN– (D2) button At open frequencies, the noise is muted and the LIGHT D4 12 to tune in the deseired station. “TUNED” and “ST” indicators are not illuminated. RC8001SR USE PAGE 2 3. Learning Remote Controller 1. D5 If the signal is weak, it may be difﬁ cult to tune into the

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001 station in stereo. In such a case, Press the MODE

INPUT SELECTOR DIRECT FREQUENCY CALL CH VOL 2. button on the front panel. Or press the TUNER button

PURE DIRECT DISP MULTI

SLEEP AUTO S LIP.SYNC and press the > button until PAGE 1 is displayed. DSD PREV MUTE M SOURCE GUIDE Press the T-MODE (D4) button. 5. MENU EXIT SURROUND 4. TV DVD VCR DSS MODE AUTO MU D1 M TEST CH.SEL SURR “AUTO” indicator is not illuminated, if FM stereo TUNER CD CD-R MD 1 2 3

PURE DIRECT THX D2 D1 7.1CH ATT SPK-AB 3. 2. STANDBY broadcasts are received in monaural and the “ST” POWER ON/OFF PHONES TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP 4 5 6 D3 D2 1. DISP OSD SLEEP 5. 5. LIGHT indicator is not illuminated. 12 7 8 9 D4 D3 RC8500SR THX Learning Remote Controller To return to auto stereo mode, Press the MODE USE PAGE 2 D5 CLEAR 0 MEMO 4. D4 PURE DIRECT DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B V-OFF PEAK ATT ANALOG SURROUND USE button or Press T-MODE button on the remote again. PAGE 2 3. DIGITAL SLEEP AUTO SURR DIRECT DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 NIGHT EQ DIGITAL D5 L C R

AAC PCM LFE SL S SR DSD AUTO indicator is illuminated the display.

TV DVD VCR DSS SURROUND MULTI TV DVD VCR DSS MODE AUTO MULTI SPEAKER BAND T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR CH VOL 7.1CH INPUT DISPLAY 2. TUNER CD CD-R MD TUNER CD CD-R MD SPEAKERS PURE DIRECT THX MultEQ A/B

ENTER MENU EXIT TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP MIC 1. 1. LIGHT LIGHT 12 12 OK RC8500SR RC8500SR Learning Remote Controller Learning Remote Controller

48 PRESET MEMORY MANUAL PRESET MEMORY RECALLING A PRESET STATION PRESET SCAN

CH VOL M CH VOL With this unit you can preset up to 60 FM/AM stations TV DVD VCR DSS D1 in any order. 3. 2. 4. TUNER CD CD-R MD D2 4. LIP.SYNC TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP OK For each station, you can memorize the frequency PREV MUTE 1. 2. OK LIGHT 2. D3 GUIDE 12 and reception mode if desired. MENU EXIT ENGLISH RC8001SR D4 TEST CH.SEL SURR Learning Remote Controller 5.

DIRECT DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B V-OFF PEAK ATT ANALOG SURROUND DIGITAL DIGITAL 1 2 3 LIP.SYNC USE SLEEP AUTO SURR DIRECT DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 NIGHT EQ PAGE 2 LIP.SYNC L C R D5 AAC PCM LFE PREV MUTE SL S SR 7.1CH ATT SPK-AB PREV MUTE SD DO 4 5 6 GUIDE 2. GUIDE MENU EXIT DISP OSD SLEEP 3. AUTO PRESET MEMORY SURROUND MULTI MODE AUTO MULTI SPEAKER BAND T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR 7 8 9 (Using the SR7001) TEST CH.SEL SURR 7.1CH INPUT DISPLAY 1 2 3 THX SPEAKERS PURE DIRECT THX MultEQ A/B CLEAR MEMO This function automatically scans the FM and AM ENTER 0 MENU EXIT

DIG MIC 2. Select the desired preset station by pressing band and enters all stations with proper signal 1. TUNER CD CD-R MD 4 5 6

DISP OSD SLEEP the 1 or 2 cursor buttons on the front panel. TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP strength into the memory. 1. 7 8 9 LIGHT THX 5. 12 CLEAR 0 MEMO RC8001SR 2. 4. 1. 3. 2. 5. (Using the remote control unit) Learning Remote Controller (Using the SR7001) AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001 1. Press the TUNER button twice within two INPUT SELECTOR VOLUME 1. Tune into the radio station you desire (Refer to seconds on the remote. (Using the remote control unit) PURE DIRECT DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B V-OFF PEAK ATT ANALOG SURROUND DIGITAL SLEEP AUTO SURR DIRECT DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 NIGHT EQ DIGITAL L C R AAC PCM LFE the “MANUAL TUNING” or “AUTO TUNING” SL S SR DSD DOWN UP 2. Press the > button until PAGE4 is displayed Press the TUNER button twice within two section). 1. SURROUND MULTI MODE AUTO MULTI SPEAKER BAND T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR Press the P-SET+ (D4) or P-SET– (D5) button seconds on the remote.

7.1CH INPUT DISPLAY 3.

SPEAKERS PURE DIRECT THX MultEQ A/B Press the MEMORY button on the front panel. STANDBY ENTER 2. to tune in the deseired preset station. MENU EXIT AUX 1 INPUT Press the > button until PAGE2 is displayed DIGITAL S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R POWER ON/OFF PHONES MIC “– –“ (preset number) starts blinking on the 2. and press the P-SCAN (D4) on the remote. display. Or enter the preset station number with the numeric buttons. “PRESET SCAN” appears on the front display Select the preset number by pressing the 1 3. and then the preset station with the lowest or 2 cursor buttons, while this is still blinking preset number is recalled fi rst. 1. To select FM , press the BAND button on the (approx. 5 seconds) front panel. Preset stations are recalled in sequence (No.1 Press the MEMORY button again to enter. The 3. 4. → No.2 → etc.) for 5 seconds each. 2. While pressing the MEMORY button, press the display stops blinking. 1 cursor button. No stored preset number will be skipped. The station is now stored in the specifi ed preset “AUTO PRESET” will appear on the display, memory location. 4. You can fast forward the preset stations, press and scanning starts from the lowest frequency. the > button until PAGE4 is displayed and 3. Each time the tuner fi nds a station, scanning (Using the remote control unit) press the P-SET+ (D4) continuously. When the desired preset station is received, will pause and the station will be played for fi ve Tune into the radio station you desire (Refer to 5. 1. cancel the preset scan operation by pressing seconds. the “MANUAL TUNING” or “AUTO TUNING” the CLEAR button or P-SCAN (D4) on the During this time, the following operations are section). remote. possible. 2. Press the MEMO button on the remote. “– –“ The band can be changed by the BAND button. (preset number) starts blinking on the display. 4. If no button is pressed during this period, the 3. Enter the desired preset number by pressing current station is memorized in location Preset the numeric buttons. 02. Note: If you wish to skip the current station, press the • When entering a single digit number (2 for example), 3 cursor button during this period, this station either input “02” or just input “2” and wait for a few is skipped and auto presetting continues. seconds. 5. Operation stops automatically when all 50 preset memory positions are fi lled or when auto scanning attains the highest end of all bands. If you desire to stop the auto preset memory at anytime, press the CLEAR button.

49 ENGLISH CLEARING STORED PRESET STATIONS SORTING PRESET STATIONS NAME INPUT OF THE PRESET STATION. 5. After selecting the ﬁ rst character to be entered, You can remove preset stations from the memory This function allows the name of each preset channel press the MEMORY or ENTER button, or press

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

using the following procedure. INPUT SELECTOR VOLUME to be entered using alphanumeric characters. the MEMO button on the remote.

PURE DIRECT DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B V-OFF PEAK ATT ANALOG SURROUND Before name inputting, you need to store preset DIGITAL SLEEP AUTO SURR DIRECT DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 NIGHT EQ DIGITAL L C R The entry in this column is ﬁ xed and the next AAC PCM LFE SL S SR DSD 2. 3. DOWN UP stations with the preset memory operation. column starts to ﬂ ash. Fill the next column the

SURROUND MULTI TEST CH.SEL SURR MODE AUTO MULTI SPEAKER BAND T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR same way. 1 2 3 7.1CH INPUT DISPLAY

SPEAKERS 7.1CH ATT SPK-AB PURE DIRECT THX MultEQ A/B 4. 5. 2. 5. 6. VOLUM STANDBY ENTER MENU EXIT AUX 1 INPUT 4 5 6 DIGITAL S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R POWER ON/OFF PHONES MIC To move back and forth between the characters, DISP OSD SLEEP D ST SPKR A B V-OFF PEAK ATT ANALOG SURROUND AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001 DIGITAL DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 NIGHT EQ DIGITAL L C R LFE 7 8 9 AAC PCM SL S SR INPUT SELECTOR VOLUME press the 1 / 2 cursor buttons or press CH+ or DOWN THX 3. CLEAR MEMO 0 PURE DIRECT DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B V-OFF PEAK ATT ANALOG SURROUND DIGITAL SLEEP AUTO SURR DIRECT DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 NIGHT EQ DIGITAL CH– button on the remote. LTI L C R AKER BAND T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR AAC PCM LFE SL S SR DSD DOWN UP

DISPLAY SPEAKERS 2. MultEQ A/B Note: SURROUND MULTI ENTER MODE AUTO MULTI SPEAKER BAND T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR EXIT AUX 1 IN DIGITAL S-VIDEO MIC 7.1CH INPUT DISPLAY

SPEAKERS PURE DIRECT THX MultEQ A/B • Unused columns should be filled by entering STANDBY ENTER MENU EXIT AUX 1 INPUT TV DVD VCR DSS DIGITAL S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R POWER ON/OFF PHONES If you have stations memorized, and there is a gap in MIC blanks. the sequential order: I.e. the stations are stored as follows 6. To save the name, press the MEMORY or 1) 87.1 MHz ENTER button on the front panel, or press the Recall the preset number to be cleared with MEMO button on the remote for more than 2 1. 2) 93.1 MHz CH VOL the method described in “Recalling” a preset SOURCE seconds. 3) 94.7 MHz 5. M station. 4. 10) 105.9 MHz OK D1 Instead of using the 3 and 4 cursor buttons or 2. Press the MEMORY button on the front panel (notice there is no stations programmed for pre sets D2 the SCAN+ and SCAN– buttons of the remote or press the MEMO button on the remote. for 4-9), you can have pre set 10 become pre set 5: 5. D3 LIP.SYNC 4. controller unit to select characters, characters PREV MUTE To sort the numbers, press and hold the MEMORY D4 can be input from the numeric keys of the The stored preset number blinks in the display 7 8 9 USE PAGE 2 3. D5 and the 4 cursor buttons. THX 4. for 5 seconds. While blinking, press the CLEAR CLEAR 0 MEMO remote control unit. See the below table for “PRESET SORT” will appear on the display and 2. button on the front panel or the remote. 5. a correspondence between characters and sorting will be done. numeric keys. 4. “xx CLEAR” appears on the display to indicate 6. that the specified preset number has been cleared. 1. Recall the preset number to be inputted name Ten keypad Press, press again, press again, etc. 1 A → B → C → 1 → A Note: with the method described in “Recalling” a preset station. 2 D → E → F → 2 → D • To clear all stored preset stations, press and hold the CLEAR and the ENTER buttons for two seconds. 2. Press the MEMORY button on the front panel 3 G → H → I → 3 → G or press the MEMO button on the remote for 4 J → K → L → 4 → J more than 3 seconds. 5 M → N → O → 5 → M 6 P Q R 6 P 3. The left most column of the station name → → → → indicator ﬂ ashes, indicating the character entry 7 S → T → U → 7 → S ready status. 8 V → W → X → 8 → V 9 Y Z space 9 Y 4. When you press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on → → → → the front panel or the SCAN+ or SCAN– buttons 0 – → + → / → 0 on the remote control unit (page 4), alphabetic and numeric characters will be displayed in the following order: A → B → C ... Z → 1 → 2 → 3 ..... 0 → – → + → / → (Blank) → A UP → → DOWN

50 RDS OPERATION PROGRAMME TYPE (PTY) DISPLAY PTY AUTO SEARCH NUMBER DISPLAY PROGRAMME TYPE 1 POP Pop Music The RDS system categorizes programmes according Your receiver is equipped to automatically search for Now in use in many countries, RDS (Radio Data 2 ROCK Rock Music to their genre into different programme type (PTY) stations transmitting any of 29 different programme System) is a description of the station’s programming 3 MOR M. O. R. Music groups. To display the programme type information types. To search for a PTY, follow these procedures: hidden space in the FM signal. of the current station, press the TUNER button and 4 LIGHT Light classical M Your new receiver is equipped with RDS to assist press the the > button until PAGE3 is displayed. 5 CLASSIC Serious classical ENGLISH D1 in the selection of FM stations using station and Press the PTY (D2) button. 2. 6 NEWS News network names, rather than broadcast frequencies. D2 1. 7 AFFAIR Current Affairs D3 Additional RDS functions include the ability to search D1 3. 8 INFO Information D4 for programme types. D2 9 SPORT Sport USE DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B V-OFF PEAK ATT ANALOG SURROUND PAGE 23 DIGITAL TV DVD VCR DSS SLEEP AUTO SURR DIRECT DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 NIGHT EQ DIGITAL D5 C 4. L R

AAC PCM LFE D3 SL S SR DOWN 10 EDUCATE Education TUNER CD CD-R MD

D4 OUND MULTI DEAUTOMULTI SPEAKER BAND T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR MENU EXIT 11 DRAMA Drama RADIO TEXT TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP USE PAGE 23 TEST CH.SEL SURR D5 7.1CH INPUT DISPLAY SPEAKERS LIGHT IRECT THX MultEQ A/B 1 2 3 12 CULTURE Culture ENTER 12 MENU EXIT DIGITAL S-V 7.1CH ATT SPK-AB Some RDS stations broadcast RADIO TEXT, which is MIC RC8500SR Learning Remote Controller 4 5 6 13 SCIENCE Science additional information on the station and programme DISP OSD SLEEP 2. CH VOL 14 OTHERS Varied 7 8 9 being broadcast. THX 15 OTHER Other Music CLEAR 0 MEMO RADIO TEXT information appears as ‘running’ text 16 WEATHER Weather PS (Program Service Name)RT (RADIO TEXT) Frequency in the display. RADIO TEXT is transmitted character 17 FINANCE Finance by the radio station. As a result of that it may take 1. Press the PTY button in the TUNER MODE on 18 CHILDREN Children’s programmes some time until the entire text has been completely 19 SOCIAL Social Affairs received. the remote controller. The current station’s PTY will be displayed, or the currently selected PTY 20 RELIGION Religion 21 PHONE IN Phone In group will be displayed in blinking if no station RDS DISPLAY 22 TRAVEL Travel or RDS data is present. 23 HOBBIES Hobbies When a receiver is tuned to an FM station that is To change to a new PTY type, press the 24 JAZZ Jazz Music transmitting RDS data, the Front Panel Information 2. Display will automatically show the station name TUNING 3 or 4 button on the front panel or 25 COUNTRY Country Music or RDS TEXT in place of the typical display of the numeric buttons on the remote until the desired 26 NATION National Music station’s broadcast frequency. PTY is shown in the display. 27 OLDIES Oldies Music To change the display, press the TUNER button and 28 FOLK Folk Music 3. Once the desired PTY group or type has 29 DOCUMENT Documentary press the the > button until PAGE3 is displayed. been selected, press the PTY button while Press the DISP (D1) button. the display blink (approx. 5 seconds). The

D1 PTY Auto search will start, and the tuner will

D2 pause at each station broadcasting RDS PTY TV DVD VCR DSS

D3 TUNER CD CD-R MD information corresponding to the selected

D4 TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP choice. USE PAGE 23 D5 LIGHT 12 To advance to the next RDS station with the RC8500SR Learning Remote Controller 4. desired PTY, press the PTY button again within CH VOL 5 seconds.

51 ENGLISH MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI – SR7001 – MULTI ROOM ROOM OUT TERMINALS SPEAKER TERMINALS The unit enters multi room mode and the display indicates “SELECT SOURCE” and flashes the SYSTEM The SR7001 allows you to connect another set “MULTI” indicator for approx. 10 seconds. 2. 1. of speakers and place them in a different room or The Multiroom System mode allows the same source separated area for Iistening to music. Select an input source with the INPUT or different sources to be heard in two rooms other AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001 3. than where this receiver is installed. INPUT SELECTOR VOLUME SELECTOR knob.

PURE DIRECT DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B V-OFF PEAK ATT ANALOG SURROUND 2. 1. DIGITAL SLEEP AUTO SURR DIRECT DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 NIGHT EQ DIGITAL L C R

AAC PCM LFE SL S SR Turn the VOLUME knob to set the volume of DSD DOWN 4. To use the multiroom system, connect the audio from AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001 the room used in the multiroom system as you SURROUND MULTI the MULTI OUT A and B AUDIO output terminals to MODE AUTO MULTI SPEAKER BAND T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR INPUT SELECTOR VOLUME 7.1CH INPUT DISPLAY like. SPEAKERS PURE DIRECT THX MultEQ A/B PURE DIRECT DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B V-OFF PEAK ATT ANALOG SURROUND DIGITAL DIGITAL STANDBY SLEEP AUTO SURR DIRECT DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 NIGHT EQ ENTER L C R MENU EXIT the MULTI ROOM A and B amps. AUX 1 INPUT AAC PCM LFE DIGITAL S-VIDEO VIDEO L SL S SR POWER ON/OFF PHONES DSD MIC DOWN Note:

SURROUND MULTI MODE AUTO MULTI SPEAKER BAND T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR • The sleep timer, monaural output and other features

7.1CH INPUT DISPLAY

Note: SPEAKERS PURE DIRECT THX MultEQ A/B STANDBY can also be set using the MAIN MENU. (See page ENTER MENU EXIT AUX 1 INPUT DIGITAL S-VIDEO VIDEO L POWER ON/OFF PHONES • The SR7001 does not have a MULTI ROOM B MIC 36.) setting. Notes for Multi Room Speaker Pressing the MULTI button on the receiver one Connect the VIDEO output (MULTI OUT) terminal to 1. • The Multiroom Speaker mode can be set for only one of the rooms, A or B. the monitor in Room A. time accesses the MULTI ROOM A settings. (MULTI VIDEO OUT terminal is linked to the source Pressing it two times accesses the MULTI • The MULTI ROOM SPEAKER output terminals can Pressing the MULTI SPEAKER button on selector in Multi Room A.) ROOM B settings. Then, pressing it a third time 1. be used when Surround Back Speaker = “NONE” turns the multiroom feature off. (The SR7001 the receiver one time accesses the MULTI in the SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See SPEAKER SPEAKER A settings. Pressing it two times SETUP, page 26) If a surround channel back speaker or speaker C does not have a MULTI ROOM B setting.) accesses the MULTI SPEAKER B settings. • “The Surr. Back Speakers are in use” is displayed (see page 19) are not used in the room where this When the MULTI ROOM setting mode is 2. Then, pressing it a third time turns the MULTI when the MULTI SPEAKER button is pressed receiver is installed, the multi speaker system can be engaged, one of the following screens appears SPEAKER feature off. when the Surround Back Speaker is not set to used with the amp for the surround back channel. on the display for 10 seconds. “NONE” in the SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See (The SR7001 does not have a MULTI SPEAKER SPEAKER SETUP, page 26) Also, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2 – SR8001 – B setting.) • The Multispeaker mode cannot be used at the terminal can be used for the monitor output of Room * Display when MULTI ROOM A is selected When the MULTI SPEAKER setting mode is same time as the speaker C. When connecting for A. 2. engaged, one of the following screens appears multiroom use, set the SPEAKER C selector switch (This feature cannot be used with the SR7001.) on the rear panel to OFF. MA DVD -18dB on the display for 10 seconds. This receiver supports multiroom system functions – SR8001 – such as source selectors, OSD menu systems, sleep * Display when MULTI ROOM B is selected timers and remote control. * Display when MULTI SPEAKER A is selected MB DVD -18dB MSA DVD -18dB

– SR7001 – * Display when MULTI SPEAKER B is selected The unit enters multi room mode and the display indicates “SELECT SOURCE” and flashes the MSB DVD -18dB “MULTI” indicator for approx. 10 seconds.

3. Select an input source with the INPUT SELECTOR knob. 4. Turn the VOLUME knob to set the volume of the room used in the multi room system as you like. Note: • The sleep timer, monaural output and other features can also be set using the MAIN MENU. (See page 36)

52 OPERATION OF THE MULTI ROOM OUTPUTS 2. Press the VOL+ or VOL− button on the WITH THE REMOTE CONTROL FROM MULTI A multi room remote control to set the desired volume. Room A output can be operated from a room where the receiver is not installed. This requires a 3. In multi room mode, the multi room remote separately sold IR receiver. (For connections, see control can be used in the multiroom to operate ENGLISH page 11.) the following functions. General: Controlling volume level, sleep timer, and muting. M 1. SeIecting input audio and video source. D1

D2 D4 Tuner:

USE PAGE 2 4 D3 D5 Selecting band, controlling preset channel up and D4 down, tuning up and down direct frequency call.

USE PAGE 1234 D5 1. CH VOL Notes for the Multi Room System 2. • The MULTI ROOM OUT (MULTl OUT/MULTI OK SPEAKER) has analog outputs.

TV DVD VCR DSS This does not support digital input signals. TUNER CD CD-R MD 2. 1. LIP.SYNC TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP PREV MUTE • If the Tuner (FM or AM) is active in the main room, GUIDE LIGHT MENU EXIT you can not control any function of the tuner.In this 12 TEST CH.SEL SURR RC8500SR Learning Remote Controller 1 2 3 case, You must listen to the same station as the main 7.1CH ATT SPK-AB room. 4 5 6 • When the component with RC-5 bus is connected to the MULTI RC IN jack(see page 19), Multiroom 1. Press MULTI on the multi room remote control A can be operated using the RC codes for the main from the MULTI ROOM. room. The remote control units of other Marantz products can also be used to control multiroom A. (Press the AMP button and press the > button (Room B output cannot be operated from another until PAGE 4 is displayed. Press the MULTI room.) (D1) button.) This operations will put the SR7001 into multi room mode and “MULTI” will be illuminated on the display. MULTl ROOM Video out put will show OSD information for the MULTI ROOM setup.

MULTI ROOM A VIDEO :DSS AUDIO :FM 102.00MHz SLEEP :90 min MONO/ST:STEREO

MULTI:OFF MAPKR:OFF VOL :VARI VOL :VARI LEVEL:-90dB LEVEL:-90dB

--- MAIN ROOM STATUS --- VIDEO:DVD AUDIO:DVD

RETURN BACK EXIT

53 ENGLISH REMOTE CONTROLLER OPERATION CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS

1. Press the desired function button. ¥ The selected function name and USE are displayed in the LCD. 2. Press the desired operation buttons to play the selected component. ¥ For details, refer to the component’s user guide. ¥ It may not be possible to operate some models.

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ DVD PLAYER (DVD MODE) CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD PLAYER (CD MODE) CONTROLLING A MARANTZ VCR (VCR MODE)

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the DVD player on and off SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the CD player on and off SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the VCR on and off POWER ON Turns the DVD player on POWER ON Turns the CD player on D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi) POWER POWER POWER OFF ON/OFF ON POWER OFF Turns the DVD player off OFF ON/OFF ON POWER OFF Turns the CD player off OFF ON/OFF ON MENU Call up the menu SOURCE D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi) SOURCE D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi) SOURCE EXIT Exits the programming menu M M M

D1 Cursor/OK Move the cursor, enters the setting D1 MENU Switches the display information D1 0-9 Input the numeric

D2 MENU Calls up the menu of DVD disc D2 0-9 Input the numeric D2 2 Play D3 0-9 Input the numeric D3 MEMO Programs D3 4 / ¢ Skip forward or previous track D4 D4 D4

USE USE USE PAGE 9 PAGE MEMO Call up the programming menu PAGE CLEAR Clears the inputting Stop 1 1 1 D5 D5 D5 CLEAR Clears the inputting 2 Play ; Pause 4 ¢ CH VOL 2 Play CH VOL / Skip forward or previous track CH VOL 0 Record 4 / ¢ Skip forward or previous chapter/ 9 Stop track OK OK ; Pause OK 9 Stop ; Pause LIP.SYNC LIP.SYNC LIP.SYNC PREV MUTE PREV MUTE PREV MUTE GUIDE GUIDE GUIDE MENU EXIT MENU EXIT MENU EXIT

TEST CH.SEL SURR TEST CH.SEL SURR TEST CH.SEL SURR 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

7.1CH ATT SPK-AB 7.1CH ATT SPK-AB 7.1CH ATT SPK-AB 4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6

DISP OSD SLEEP DISP OSD SLEEP DISP OSD SLEEP 7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9

THX THX THX CLEAR 0 MEMO CLEAR 0 MEMO CLEAR 0 MEMO

TV DVD VCR DSS TV DVD VCR DSS TV DVD VCR DSS

TUNER CD CD-R MD TUNER CD CD-R MD TUNER CD CD-R MD

TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP

LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT 12 12 12

RC8001SR RC8001SR RC8001SR Learning Remote Controller Learning Remote Controller Learning Remote Controller

54 ENGLISH

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD RECORDER (CDR MODE) CONTROLLING A MARANTZ MD DECK (MD MODE) CONTROLLING A MARANTZ TAPE DECK (TAPE MODE)

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the CD recorder on and off SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the MD deck on and off SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the TAPE deck on and off POWER ON Turns the CD recorder on POWER ON Turns the MD deck on POWER ON Turns the TAPE deck on POWER POWER POWER OFF ON/OFF ON POWER OFF Turns the CD recorder off OFF ON/OFF ON POWER OFF Turns the MD deck off OFF ON/OFF ON POWER OFF Turns the TAPE deck off SOURCE D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi) SOURCE D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi) SOURCE D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi) M M M

D1 MENU Switches the display information D1 MENU Switches the display information D1 0-9 Input the numeric

D2 0-9 Input the numeric D2 0-9 Input the numeric D2 MEMO Programs D3 MEMO Programs D3 MEMO Programs D3 CLEAR Clears the inputting D4 D4 D4

USE PAGE USE USE PAGE 2 CLEAR Clears the inputting PAGE CLEAR Clears the inputting Play 1 1 1 D5 D5 D5 2 Play 2 Play 4 / ¢ Skip forward or previous track 4 ¢ 4 ¢ CH VOL / Skip forward or previous track CH VOL / Skip forward or previous track CH VOL 9 Stop 9 Stop 9 Stop ; Pause

OK ; Pause OK ; Pause OK 0 Record 0 Record 0 Record

LIP.SYNC LIP.SYNC LIP.SYNC PREV MUTE PREV MUTE PREV MUTE GUIDE GUIDE GUIDE MENU EXIT MENU EXIT MENU EXIT

TEST CH.SEL SURR TEST CH.SEL SURR TEST CH.SEL SURR 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

7.1CH ATT SPK-AB 7.1CH ATT SPK-AB 7.1CH ATT SPK-AB 4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6

DISP OSD SLEEP DISP OSD SLEEP DISP OSD SLEEP 7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9

THX THX THX CLEAR 0 MEMO CLEAR 0 MEMO CLEAR 0 MEMO

TV DVD VCR DSS TV DVD VCR DSS TV DVD VCR DSS

TUNER CD CD-R MD TUNER CD CD-R MD TUNER CD CD-R MD

TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP TAPE AUX1 AUX2 AMP

LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT 12 12 12

RC8001SR RC8001SR RC8001SR Learning Remote Controller Learning Remote Controller Learning Remote Controller

55 ENGLISH BASIC OPERATION See the attached manufacturer number list for the View the supplied manufacturer number list, This example shows how to set a DVD player. preset manufacturers, devices, preset numbers, and 1. and fi nd the number of the manufacturer for the 4 5 7 other settings. USE MODE device that you are using. Remote control Corresponding Device name source name preset code Hold down the M button for three seconds or (Normal operation status) 2. TV TV Television LEARN LEARN This remote control is preset with a total of 12 types more. DVD DVD DVD player The menu is displayed. of remote codes, including Marantz TV (television), VCR VCR Video deck DVD, VCR (VCR deck), DSS (satellite broadcasting Press the D1 (PRESET) direct button. 3. PAGE DSS SATELLITE Satellite broadcasting 12 12 12 tuner), TUNER, CD/CD-R, MD, TAPE (tape deck), tuner equipment The Preset setting (P-SET) is displayed. AUX1, AUX2, and AMP (amplifi er). TUNER RECEIVER/TUNER AM FM TUNER Learning is not necessary for Marantz products. You CD CD/CD-R PLAYER CD player 4. Press the DVD source button. 1. Turn on the power of the DVD player. can use these products without setting any codes. CD-R CD/CD-R PLAYER CD recorder 5. Press the numeric buttons to enter the four- 2. Hold down the M button for three seconds or MD CD/CD-R PLAYER MD deck digit manufacturer number. more. TAPE TAPE Cassette deck Example: To enter “0600” from the manufacturer The menu is displayed. 1. Press the SOURCE button. AUX1 CABLE Cable television number list. For this example, press DVD. AUX2 LASER DISC Laser disc player To correct the entered number, use the 1 or 2 Press the D1 (PRESET) direct button. DVD is shown on the LCD, and the remote control 3. AMP AMPLIFIER Amplifi er or receiver cursor button to enter the correct number. The Preset setting (P-SET) is displayed. is set for DVD. RECEIVER/TUNER Pressing the SOURCE button once changes the ¥ If no button is pressed for over one minute 4. Press the DVD source button. remote control to the settings for the source that ¥ When using Marantz products, TV and DVD can during the setting process, any settings that Hold down the CH+ or CH– button for one was pressed. 5. be set to TV1 (TV/VDP: Projector) and TV2 (PDP: were made are cancelled. second or more. To change the amplifi er or other source, press the Plasma display), and DVD1 (fi rst DVD player) and SOURCE button twice (double-click). The code DVD2 (second DVD player), respectively, to match 6. Press the OK cursor button. 6. Press the CH+ button repeatedly in the interval is sent, and then the amplifier source changes to the customer’s operating environment. These Confirm the OK is displayed and then the for one second. DVD. 7. The signal is transmitted, and the display cycles settings are made in PRESET mode. display returns to the Preset Setting (P-SET). through the code number. Press the buttons to operate the DVD. In the factory default state, the remote control is When the manufacturer number is entered correctly, 2. OK is displayed momentarily on the screen. Press the CH– button to go back to a number The indicator is shown on the LCD while the set to TV1 and DVD1. To make the presets, enter screen. remote control codes are being transmitted. It is not the numbers below while referring to the section ¥ If you enter a number not in the manufacturer displayed when buttons without stored code are “Entering and Setting the Manufacturer Number Release the button once the DVD player turns pressed. number list, WRONG CODE is displayed, 7. Directly”. and then you return to the preset setting off. 3. The direct buttons can be used to perform up TV1: 0001, TV2: 0002 again 8. Press the OK cursor button. to 20 operations for each of the 12 sources, DVD1: 0001, DVD2: 0002 Check the manufacturer number list, and Confirm the OK is displayed and then the including DVD, TV, AMP, and other AV 9. either set a different number or use the display returns to the Preset Setting (P-SET). equipment. Entering and Setting the Manufacturer Number Di- The buttons consist of the D1 to D5 buttons, and sequence function to set. To set the manufacturer number for another rectly 10. the equipment is operated by pressing the buttons To set the manufacturer number for another source device, repeat the procedure in steps 4 corresponding to the indicators on the LCD. 8. Refer to the manufacturer number list. source device, repeat the procedure in steps 4 to 8. Four pages are available, and press the > button This example shows how to set a SAMSUNG DVD to 6. After the settings are completed, press the M to select a page. The current page position is player. 11. displayed on the LCD. 9. After the settings are completed, press the M button. 2 3 4 button. 12. Press the buttons on the remote control to 10. Press the buttons on the remote control to check that the DVD can be operated correctly. PRESET MODE check that the DVD can be operated correctly. LEARN LEARN Check the following points if the equipment which (When operating non-Marantz AV equipment Setting Equipment Not Appearing in Manufacturer was set does not operate properly. products) Number List ¥ If there is more than one number in the manufacturer This remote control is preset with remote control USE PAGE 1 12 12 number list, try setting a different number. Use the sequence function to set equipment not codes from AV equipment by other manufacturers. ¥ There may be some buttons which cannot be 5 6 appearing in the manufacturer number list. You may The preset codes are TV, VCR, LD, CABLE, DSS, used. Program the codes to the required buttons. still be unable to set some equipment even when DVD, TAPE, TUNER, CD/CD-R, MD and AMP. using the sequence function. In this case, the remote Settings can be made in one of two ways. control can be programmed with codes individually. When the preset codes are set, the following codes LEARN LEARN In the sequence function, the power ON/OFF codes are contained in the SOURCE button of the remote are transmitted by pressing the remote control control. buttons in order. 12 12 If the power for the equipment is left on, hold down the button until the equipment is turned off, and then release. This completes the setting. 56 LEARN MODE 6. Press and hold down the 2 (PLAY) button of the Programming the Direct Buttons and Rewriting 7. To change the name, press the numeric Programming the 2 (PLAY) and Other Control But- transmitting DVD remote control, and check that Names buttonsto enter the text. tons and Numeric Buttons OK is displayed on the LCD. This example shows how to program codes from ¥ Use the cursor buttons 1 2 to move to the The remote control has fi nished learning when OK other manufacturer products to the DVD MENU sections to be rewritten on the LCD. This remote control is capable of learning and storing is displayed on the LCD. button (D1) and change the display to OSD. codes used by other remote controls that you already If ERROR is displayed on the LCD, some error has ¥ To change MENU to OSD, press the 5 ENGLISH own. prevented the command from being learned. If this 6 7 8 numeric button. For codes which are not learned, the remote control happens, repeat the procedure for steps 4 and 5. Each time the button is pressed, the display will transmit either the Marantz preset codes from In some rare cases, ERROR may be displayed cycles through M → N → O → 5 → M. the initial settings, or remote codes from another repeatedly during the learning operation. In this manufacturer’s AV equipment which is set by the case, the transmitting remote control may have LEARN LEARN LEARN 8. After rewriting of the text is completed, press customer. special signal codes. These codes cannot be the OK cursor button. The receiver sensor for the remote control signals is learned by this remote control. To delete text that is already entered, press the 0 PAGE 12 PAGE 12 PAGE 12 button to insert a space. located at the top of the remote control. Follow the same procedure to make the remote 7. ¥ In this example, MENU is changed to “OSD control learn the other buttons. This example shows how to learn the codes from the 1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or (space) (space)” in this step, and then OSD remote control of a DVD player. 8. Repeat the procedure in steps 3 to 6 to have more. is displayed in the right side by pressing the the remote control learn the signal codes from The menu is displayed. OK button. 1 2 4 a TV, CD player, or other AV equipment. 2. Press the D2 (LEARN) direct button. For details, refer to the section “Rewriting Names”. ¥ When no buttons are pressed for The LEARN setting (LEARN) indicator is displayed. In the same way, use the > button to select approximately one minute during the The LEARN indicator then blinks. 9.

LEARN LEARN the page, and then press the direct button to learning operation, the remote control 3. Press the DVD source button. program the codes. automatically returns to USE mode. The first page of the direct button screen is displayed. There are four available pages. Pressing 10. After programming the codes for each of the USE PAGE 1 PAGE 12 12 ¥ When programming the source buttons, the > buttons cycles through the pages in this order buttons, press the M button. switch to the source in step 3, and then 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 1. The USE indicator displays on the LCD, and the press the source button again. 6 (When OK) (failed) (codes are full) newly stored codes can be transmitted. 4. Press the D1 (MENU) direct button. 9. When you have finished programming the The LEARN indicator blinks, and then displays to codes for each button, press the M button. indicate that learning is ready. REWRITING NAMES The USE indicator is displayed on the LCD, and the LEARN LEARN newly stored codes can be used. 5. Place the receiver sensor of the remote control This remote control allows the rewriting of names (top) so that it is facing the transmitter of the ¥ If FULL is displayed on the LCD, the for the sources and direct buttons. This operation is DVD remote control (top) at a distance of about performed for each individual source. PAGE 12 PAGE 12 12 memory cannot hold any more learned 5 cm (2 inches). This example shows how to change the source name codes in LEARN mode. from DVD to AVD and AUDIO to SOUND. Press and hold down the OSD button of the Hold down the M button for three seconds or If FULL is displayed no matter how many 6. 1. transmitting DVD remote control, and check that 3 4 5 more. times you try the learning operation, the The menu is displayed. OK is displayed on the LCD. remote control cannot accept any more new The remote control has fi nished learning when OK 2. Press the D2 (LEARN) direct button. codes until some of the previously learned is displayed on the LCD. LEARN codes are deleted from the memory. Delete If ERROR is displayed on the LCD, some error has LEARN The LEARN setting (LEARN) is displayed. The NAME NAME indicator then blinks. some of the learned buttons from the prevented the command from being learned. If this sources. happens, repeat the procedure for steps 4 and 5. 3. Press the DVD source button. PAGE 12 USE PAGE 12 PAGE 12 ¥ After learning is completed, the remote 4. Press the 2 (PLAY) button. The M button and > button cannot be taught. Only The LEARN indicator blinks, and then displays to control automatically switches to name 7 8 9 indicate that learning is ready. each one code can be learned for the LIGHT buttons rewriting mode. The left end “ ” indicator 1 and 2, regardless of the source. on the MENU blinks to indicate that the 5. Place the receiver sensor of the remote control blinking part can be rewritten. (top) so that it is facing the transmitter of the NAME NAME NAME DVD remote control (top) at a distance of about ¥ If no names will be rewritten, press the 5 cm (2 inches). OK cursor button. The display returns to learning standby mode by pressing the OK PAGE 12 PAGE 12 PAGE 12 cursor button. 1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or more. The menu is displayed. 2. Press the D3 (NAME) direct button . 57 ENGLISH 3. Press the DVD source button . ERASING PROGRAMMED CODES 6. Press the AMP source button . 6. Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase. The NAME indicator blinks. (RETURNING TO INITIAL SETTINGS) All codes and names programmed to page 2 are The “ ” blinks to indicate that the letter can be 7. Press the > button to display the fi rst page for erased. When the codes are cleared, the codes Codes can be erased in fi ve ways: by buttons, direct changed. AMP. for this button reset to the factory default code or buttons, direct button pages, sources, and by all 8. Press the D1 (AUTO) direct button to be erased become blank. Any rewritten names return to the 4. Press the 2 cursor button twice. memory contents. original name. The D in DVD blinks to indicate that the letter can while holding down the CLEAR button . be changed. Erasing Buttons and Erasing Direct Buttons 9. Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase. ¥ To cancel the erasing operation, press the The code programmed to the AUTO button is D5 (NO) button to return to the previous 5. Press the 1 numeric button to select A. This example shows how to erase the code learned erased. Each time the numeric buttons are pressed, the screen. from the PLAY button of the DVD player and the When the code is cleared, the code for this button button cycles through the alphanumeric characters AUTO code of the AMP direct button. When the erasing operation is fi nished, press shown below. resets to the factory default code or becomes blank. 7. Erasing buttons The rewritten name returns to the original name. the M button . 1: A → B → C → 1 → A The USE indicator lights up to indicate that the 2: D → E → F → 2 → D 1 3 4 ¥ To cancel the erasing operation, press the remote control can now be operated. 3: G → H → I → 3 → G D5 (NO) button to return to the previous 4: J → K → L → 4 → J screen. Erasing Sources 5: M → N → O → 5 → M 6: P → Q → R → 6 → P LEARN LEARN 10. When the erasing operation is fi nished, press This procedure clears all codes and names 7: S → T → U → 7 → S the M button . programmed to the DVD, TV, or other sources. All The USE indicator displays to indicate that the 8: V → W → X → 8 → V codes and names in the four direct button pages are USE PAGE 1 12 USE PAGE 12 remote control can now be operated. 9: Y → Z → / → 9 → Y also erased. 0: SPACE ( ) + — , ’ < > ? 0 This example shows how to erase the names and → → → → → → → → Erasing Direct Button Pages → SPACE ( ) 1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or codes learned from the DVD player. more. This example shows how to erase the entire direct 1 3 4 6. Press the 1 or 2 cursor button . The menu is displayed. The letter is changed to “A”. button second page learned from the DVD player. ¥ The 3 and 4 cursor buttons can be used to 2. Press the D5 (ERASE) direct button . 1 3 4 move the blinking indicator of the section to 3. Press the DVD source button . LEARN LEARN be rewritten. The USE and LEARN indicators blink.

Press the button 2 (PLAY) that you want to LEARN LEARN 7. Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons to select 4. USE PAGE 1 USE PAGE 12 USE PAGE 12 AUDIO on the direct button indicator. The erase while holding down the CLEAR button . A message is displayed on the LCD.

A fl ashes to indicate that the name can be USE PAGE USE PAGE 1 12 12 1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or changed. 5. Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase. The code programmed to the 2 (PLAY) button is more. 5 The menu is displayed. 8. Press the 7 numeric button to select S. erased. Each time the button is pressed, the button cycles When the code is cleared, the code for this button through S → T → U → 7 → S. 2. Press the D5 (ERASE) direct button . resets to the factory default code or becomes blank. 3. Press the DVD source button . Press the cursor button to move the fl ashing LEARN 9. 2 ¥ To cancel the erasing operation, press the The USE and LEARN indicators blink. section. D5 (NO) button to return to the previous Press the DVD source button while holding Press the 5 numeric button to select 0. display. 4. 10. USE PAGE 12 down the CLEAR button . 11. Follow the same procedure to enter U, N, and To erase codes programmed for the CLEAR button, simply press the CLEAR button 5. Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase. D. All codes and names programmed to the DVD twice. 1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or 12. When fi nished entering the text, press the OK more. source are erased. When the codes are cleared, cursor button . To erase codes programmed for the The menu is displayed. the codes for this button reset to the factory default SOURCE button, simply press the SOURCE code or become blank. Any rewritten names return 13. Press the M button . button twice. 2. Press the D5 (ERASE) direct button . to the original name. The USE indicator displays on the LCD, and the newly stored codes can be used. 3. Press the DVD source button . ¥ To cancel the erasing operation, press the USE LEARN The input is overwritten, and so the currently Erasing direct buttons The and indicators blink. D5 (NO) button to return to the previous displayed text is erased. 6 8 9 4. Press the > button to display the second display. Up to six characters can be entered for the direct page. button indicator. 6. When the erasing operation is fi nished, press 5. Press the > button while holding down the the M button . USE LEARN LEARN The indicator displays to indicate that the LEARN CLEAR button . remote control can now be operated.

USE PAGE USE PAGE 12 USE PAGE 12 12

58 Erasing All Note: 4. Press the buttons in the sequence that you EXECUTING MACRO PROGRAMS This procedure clears (resets) all programmed • If the signal transmission interval (interval time) want the operations performed. is changed using the Setup mode (described later), The actual program starts here. 1 2 3 codes and names. Once all the data is cleared, the this transmission interval is applied to all macro memory is returned to the factory default status. The Each time a button is pressed, the name of the programs. To change individual signal transmission button is displayed on the LCD. programmed macros are also erased. intervals, use the procedures in this section for ENGLISH 1 3 4 programming macros and revising macros. 4-1 4-2 4-3 ¥ No signals are transmitted while programming a MACRO MACRO MACRO macro. PAGE 12 PAGE 12 PAGE 12 ¥ The M button, > button, cursor buttons, MEMO LEARN LEARN LEARN LEARN LEARN button, CLEAR button, and VOL buttons cannot be programmed. MACRO MACRO MACRO 1. Press the M button shortly. The macro menu is displayed.

PAGE 12 PAGE 12 PAGE 12 USE USE USE PAGE 12 ¥ If no button is pressed for approximately one PAGE 1 PAGE 12 minute during programming, the remote control 2. Press the D1 (M-01) direct button . returns to the state before macro mode. Hold down the M button for three seconds or 4 -1. Press the DVD source button . 3. Check that the operations of the program are 1. In this case, the macro program is not stored. executed step by step. more. 4-2. Press the 2 (PLAY) button . The name of the operation button is displayed on The menu is displayed. ¥ When executing macro mode, performing the source switching operation two or more times 4-3. Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons . the LCD. 2. Press the D5 (ERASE) direct button . only changes the remote control mode and does The interval time is displayed on the LCD. ¥ The programmed section is indicated by The USE and LEARN indicators blink. & not transmit any signals. (Switching of the source 4 -4. Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and set to 2.0 . The bar indicator moves to indicate the 3. Press the CLEAR button while holding down selector of the amplifi er is valid only once.) (seconds). progress of the program. Select DVD source PLAY transmit Interval the POWER ON and OFF buttons at the same ¥ Use the 3 cursor button to increase the time → → time. time: 2 seconds → Select TV → TV INPUT transmit PROGRAMMING MACROS and the 4 button to decrease the time. The → Select AMP → AUTO transmit → End Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase. interval time can be set from 0.5 seconds to 4. This example shows how to program a macro to the ¥ To cancel transmission of the program while All programmed codes and names are erased and 5 seconds. reset to the factory default settings. M-01 button. it is in progress, press any button. (The screens shown in the example are the default ¥ To stop the time adjustment, press the D5 ¥ To cancel the erasing operation, press the factory states. If the names of direct buttons (CANCEL) direct button. D5 (NO) button to return to the previous were rewritten, these modified names would be CHANGING NAMES OF MACRO PROGRAMS -5 Press the OK cursor button . screen. displayed.) 4 . Under the factory default settings, the names of the ¥ To erase all operation takes a few seconds Switch amplifi er to DVD source → Play DVD player 4-6. Press the TV source button . macro programs are set from M-01 to M-20, but you after the D4 (YES) button is pressed. → Set the interval to 2 seconds until the next signal is 4-7. Press the > button to display the fi rst page. can change them to any desired name. sent → Switch TV to video input → Set the amplifi er The text can have up to six characters, and it is -8 Press the D1 (INPUT) direct button . mode to AUTO 4 . entered using the numeric buttons. -9 Press the AMP source button . 1 2 3 4 . This example shows how to change the M-01 name PROGRAMMING MACROS 4 -10. Press the > button to display the fi rst page. to MOVIE. This remote control can program a series of button 4 -11. Press the D1 (AUTO) direct button . 1 2 3 operations in sequence. LEARN LEARN 4 -12. Press the OK cursor button . Macros are a function that makes it possible to use The LCD displays END to indicate that programming MACRO MACRO is completed. a single button operation to perform a complex LEARN LEARN series of button operations any number of times. A USE PAGE 1 PAGE 12 PAGE 12 To program another macro, repeat the MACRO MACRO single button can be programmed to perform up to 5. procedure in steps 3 to 4-12. 20 steps in sequence. A total of 20 buttons can be Hold down the M button for three seconds or USE PAGE 1 PAGE 12 PAGE 12 programmed with macros. 1. To exit macro programming, press the M button more. 6. ¥ For example, the following sequence of operations The menu is displayed. . 4 5 6 USE can be programmed to a macro. The indicator displays to indicate that the 2. Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button . remote control can now be operated. Switch amplifi er to DVD source → Set amplifi er The macro menu is displayed. When the macro are programmed 20 operations or mode to AUTO → Play DVD player → Switch TV The MACRO indicator displays and LEARN blinks. more, the display returns macro menu. NAME NAME NAME

to video input Edit the macro so that it has 20 operations or less. MACRO MACRO MACRO Press the D1 (M-01) direct button . The factory default for the transmission interval 3. The menu has four pages, and so use the > button PAGE 12 PAGE 12 PAGE 12 (time) between macro operations is one second, to select the page when programming other buttons. but these signal transmission intervals can be set between approximately 0.5 seconds and 5 seconds 1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or in the Setup mode. Each transmission interval can more. be adjusted independently when programming or The menu is displayed. revising a macro. 59 ENGLISH 2. Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button. 2. Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button. 6. Press the TV source button. CLEARING MACRO PROGRAMS The macro menu is displayed. The macro menu is displayed. TV blinks for 0.5 seconds. When clearing macros, the macros programmed to The MACRO indicator displays and LEARN blinks. The MACRO indicator displays and LEARN blinks. 7. Press the D1 (INPUT) direct button. the button are erased. Modifi ed macro names are 3. Press the D1 (M-01) direct button . 3. Press the D1 (M-01) direct button. INPUT blinks for 0.5 seconds. also returned to the factory default settings. This The NAME is displayed. TV and INPUT are overwritten. example shows how to clear a macro with the name Press the D5 (EDIT) direct button. 4. MOVIE programmed to M-02. 4. Press the D3 (NAME) direct button . The LCD displays DVD, and the step position is ¥ To check the modifi ed steps, press the 1 or The “ ” blinks to indicate that rewriting is possible. indicated by 9. 2 cursor button. 1 4 5 The programmed section is indicated by &. 5. Press the 5 numeric button to select M. 8. To exit, press the M button. 5. Press the 2 cursor button to display TV. When fi nished, to change another macro program, 6. Press the 2 cursor button to next. press the OK cursor button to return to the menu, LEARN LEARN The “ ” blinks to indicate that rewriting is possible. 6. Press the CLEAR button . and then repeat the procedure for steps 3 to 8.

The LCD displays CLEAR, and TV and INPUT are MACRO MACRO MACRO 7. Press the 5 numeric button to select O. deleted. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7, and then enter V, I, E When deleting steps from a macro program, the INSERTING STEPS IN MACRO PROGRAMS PAGE 12 PAGE 12 PAGE 12 and “ (space)”. operations performed for a source after switching to the source are also deleted. This example shows how to change the macro ¥ To make changes in the text while entering 1. Press the M button for three second or more. If the CLEAR button is pressed at the INPUT programmed to M-01 from The macro menu is displayed. it, use the 1 or 2 cursor buttons to move to position, only the INPUT step is deleted. DVD → PLAY → AMP → AUTO the blinking section. The & indicator for the step is also changed. to 2. Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button . The macro menu is displayed. 9. After making the changes, press the OK cursor ¥ To check the modiﬁ ed steps, press the 1 or DVD → PLAY → TV → INPUT → AMP → AUTO button. 2 cursor button. 4 6 8 3. Press the D2 (MOVIE) direct button while holding down the CLEAR button. ¥ To change the names of other macro 7. To exit, press the M button. programs, repeat the procedure in steps 3 When ﬁ nished, to change another macro program, 4. Press the D4 (YES) direct button to clear the press the OK cursor button to return to the menu, to 9. LEARN LEARN macro. and then repeat the procedure for steps 3 to 6. NAME To cancel the clearing operation, press the NO (D5 10. To exit, press the M button. MACRO MACRO MACRO button).

PAGE PAGE PAGE OVERWRITING STEPS IN MACRO PROGRAMS 12 12 12 5. To exit, press the M button. ERASING STEPS OF MACRO PROGRAMS When ﬁ nished, to change another macro program, This example shows how to change the macro press the OK cursor button to return to the menu, This example shows how to delete the TV and Hold down the M button for three seconds or programmed to M-01 from 1. and then repeat the procedure for steps 2 to 4. INPUT steps from the following macro programmed more. DVD PLAY AMP AUTO to M-01. → → → The menu is displayed. to The program is changed from DVD → PLAY → TV → INPUT. 2. Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button. DVD → PLAY → TIME → TV → INPUT → AMP → The macro menu is displayed. AUTO 4 6 7 The MACRO indicator displays and LEARN blinks. to Press the D1 (M-01) direct button . DVD → PLAY → TIME → AMP → AUTO. 3. Press the D5 (EDIT) direct button . LEARN LEARN LEARN 4. 1 2 3 The LCD displays DVD, and the step position is MACRO MACRO MACRO indicated by 7. The programmed section is indicated by &. PAGE 12 PAGE 12 PAGE 12 LEARN LEARN 5. Press the 2 cursor button so that AMP is MACRO MACRO 1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or displayed.

USE PAGE 1 PAGE PAGE 12 more. 12 6. Press the MEMO button. The menu is displayed. 7. Press the TV source button. 4 5 6 2. Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button. TV blinks for 0.5 seconds The macro menu is displayed. 8. Press the D1 (INPUT) direct button. The MACRO indicator displays and LEARN blinks. INPUT blinks for 0.5 seconds. Press the D1 (M-01) direct button. TV and INPUT are inserted. NAME NAME 3. NAME MACRO MACRO MACRO 4. Press the D5 (EDIT) direct button. 9. Press the OK cursor button. The LCD displays DVD, and the step position is

PAGE 12 PAGE 12 PAGE 12 ¥ To check the modiﬁ ed steps, press the or indicated by 9. 1 The programmed section is indicated by &. 2 cursor button. Hold down the M button for three seconds or 10. To exit, press the M button. 1. Press the 2 cursor button so that AMP is When ﬁ nished, to change another macro program, more. 5. The menu is displayed. displayed. press the OK cursor button to return to the menu, 60 and then repeat the procedure for steps 3 to 9. SETTING THE MACRO TIMER EXECUTING THE MACRO TIMER 1. Place the receiver sensor of the receiving COPYING BY SOURCE Setting the macro timer enables the macro program The macro program starts when the time that was remote control (top) so that it is facing the The 12 sources can be copied on a source by source to automatically turn the power for a device on or off set is reached. The TIMER indicator lights up transmitter of the transmitting remote control basis. You can select from up to 12 source types. or perform other operations. whenever the macro timer is activated. (top) at a distance of about 5 cm (2 inches). In the settings, you can select to execute the macro Note: Hold down the M button of the transmitting ENGLISH timer everyday or only once. 2. 6 7 8 • To execute the macro timer, place the remote remote control for three seconds or more. Be sure to set the clock to the correct time before control facing the infrared sensor of the device to The menu is displayed. using the timer. The macro timer can only be set for be operated. If the remote control is not in a suitable Press the > button to display the fourth page one program a day. position, it may not operate the device properly. 3. LEARN This example shows how to use the timer only once CLONE menu. at 20:35 to execute a macro programmed to M-01. 4. Press the D3 (TX) direct button. The transmitting side is now ready. PAGE 1234 1234 PAGE 1234 2 3 4 CLONE MODE 5. Hold down the M button of the receiving remote control for three seconds or more. 1. Place the receiver sensor of the receiving CREATING COPIES USING CLONE MODE The menu is displayed. remote control (top) so that it is facing the

LEARN LEARN All of the codes programmed to the RC8001SR transmitter of the transmitting remote control MACRO MACRO Press the > button to display the fourth page remote control can be copied to another RC8001SR 6. (top) at a distance of about 5 cm (2 inches). CLONE menu. USE PAGE 123 PAGE 12 123 using a few simple operations. 2. Hold down the M button of the transmitting 7. Press the D1 (RX) direct button. remote control for three seconds or more. ¥ The remote control can copy the entire contents or The receiving side is now ready. 5 6 the contents for speciﬁ c source buttons. The menu is displayed. ¥ When copying the entire contents, all programmed 8. Press the OK cursor button on the receiving 3. Press the > button to display the fourth page codes, modiﬁ ed names, programmed macros, and remote control. CLONE menu.

LEARN signal transmission intervals are copied. LEARN 9. Press the OK cursor button on the transmitting 4. Press the D3 (TX) direct button. The transmitting side is now ready. MACRO MACRO When copying the contents for source buttons, remote control. When copying is started, the bar indicators on both the programmed codes and modiﬁ ed names are Hold down the M button of the receiving remote PAGE 123 PAGE 123 LCDs start to move from the left to the right. 5. copied. control for three seconds or more. Note: ¥ When the copying operation is completed, Press the > button to display the fourth page Hold down the M button for three seconds or 6. 1. • The clone function can only be used for copying TX OK is displayed on the LCD of the CLONE menu. more. when using the same model (RC8001SR) for both transmitting remote control, and RX OK The menu is displayed. Press the D2 (RX-S) direct button. the transmitting and receiving remote control. is displayed on the LCD of the receiving 7. Press the > button to display the third page remote control. 8. Press the source button to be copied. 2. The receiving side is now ready. TIMER menu. COPYING ENTIRE CONTENTS ¥ Do not touch either of the remote controls The name of the source which was pressed is 3. Press the D2 (ONCE?) direct button. during the copying operation. Doing so displayed on the LCD. The M-TMR menu is displayed on the LCD. could cause copying to fail. ¥ Each time the source button is pressed, the ¥ To cancel timer operation, press CANCEL. 3 4 9 ¥ If the copying fails in the middle of the name is displayed on the LCD. 4. Press the D1 (M-01) direct button . copying process, RX ERROR is displayed 9. Press the OK cursor button on the receiving The time which is set previously is displayed. on the receiving remote control. Check and remote control. perform steps 1 to 7 again. 5. Press the 2 and 0 numeric button to set the NAME 10. Press the OK cursor button on the transmitting hour indicator to 20. ¥ Copying takes about three minutes to remote control. complete when the transmitting remote When copying is started, the bar indicators on both Press the 3 and 5 numeric button to set the PAGE 1234 PAGE 1234 PAGE 12 6. control has been programmed to 100% LCDs start to move from the left to the right. minute indicator to 35. capacity. ¥ When the copying operation is completed, Press the OK cursor button. TX OK is displayed on the LCD of the 7. Once copying is completed, press the M button This ﬁ nalizes the time. 5 6 9 10. transmitting remote control, and RX OK on both remote controls. 8. To exit, press the M button. is displayed on the LCD of the receiving To cancel the macro timer, return to the TIMER remote control. menu and press the D5 (CANCEL) and then press ¥ Do not touch either of the remote controls D1 (M-01). during the copying operation. Doing so could cause copying to fail.

PAGE 1234 PAGE 1234 1234 ¥ If the copying fails in the middle of the copying process, ERROR is displayed on the remote control. Check and perform steps 1 to 7 again. 61 ENGLISH 11. Once copying is completed, press the M button SETTING THE MACRO INTERVAL TIME ADJUSTING THE DISPLAY CONTRAST on both remote controls. When a macro program is executed, control signals The contrast of the LCD can be adjusted. Adjust are transmitted in sequence. This transmission for maximum visibility according to your viewing interval (interval time) can be set in 0.5-seconds units environment. from 0.5 to 5 seconds. 2 3 4 SETUP If the interval time is set in this Setup mode, the interval times for all programmed macros are SETTING THE LIGHTING TIME changed. If necessary, use EDIT (see page 60) in the ¥ The LCD lights up when the LIGHT buttons are macro program to change the individual transmission LEARN LEARN pressed. The LCD remains lit while the pressed times. button is held down, and it goes off when the The factory default setting for the transmission button is released. interval is 1 second. PAGE 12 1234 1234 ¥ The LCD continues to light up if another button is pressed while it is lit or if pressed within two This example shows how to set the interval time to 1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or seconds after the light goes off. 5 seconds. more. The menu is displayed. ¥ The lighting time can be set in one-second units 2 3 4 from 0 to 60 seconds. 2. Press the > button to display the second page The LIGHT buttons have light-absorbing properties SETUP menu. that enable them to store light. If the buttons are no LEARN LEARN 3. Press the D3 (CONT) direct button . longer illuminated in a dimly lit environment, bring the buttons near a fl uorescent lamp or other light source 4. Press the 3 or 4 cursor button and set the display contrast for maximum visibility. for a suffi cient amount of time. This should illuminate PAGE 12 1234 1234 The adjustment has 10 levels. the buttons again. The factory default setting for the contrast is the fi fth ¥ The LIGHT buttons consist of a LIGHT1 and level. LIGHT2 button, and they both perform the same 1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or operation. more. The menu is displayed. 5. Press the OK cursor button to enter the display The factory default lighting time is set to 15 contrast. Press the > button to display the second page seconds. 2. Once the setting is finished, press the M SETUP menu. 6. button. This example shows how to set the lighting time to 3. Press the D2 (I-TIME) direct button. 20 seconds. 4. Press the 3 or 4 cursor button to set the 2 3 4 interval time. Holding down the cursor button fast-forwards the time indicator.

LEARN LEARN 5. Press the OK cursor button to enter the interval time. Once the setting is finished, press the M PAGE 12 1234 1234 6. button. 1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or more. The menu is displayed. 2. Press the > button to display the second page SETUP menu. 3. Press the D1 (LIGHT) direct button . The LIGHT is displayed on the LCD 4. Press the 3 or 4 cursor button to set the lighting time. 5. Press the OK cursor button to enter the lighting time. 6. Once the setting is finished, press the M button. 62 TROUBLESHOOTING SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY Can not select EX/ES mode. Surround center= NONE has been Make the correct setting. In case of trouble, check the following before calling for service: selected in SPEAKERS SIZE SETUP 1. Are the connections made properly ? Input signal is incompatible. Use 5.1channel source. 2. Are you operating the unit properly following the user’s guide ? ENGLISH 3. Are the power ampliﬁ ers and speaker working properly ? Can not select Pro Logic IIx Input signal is incompatible. Use 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM input mode. signal or analog input signal.

If the unit does not operate properly, check items shown in the following table. Can not select Neo:6 mode. Input signal is incompatible. Use 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM input signal or analog input signal. If your trouble cannot be recovered with the remedy actions listed in the following table, malfunction of the internal circuitry is suspected; immediately unplug the power cable and contact your dealer, nearest Marantz Can not select CSII mode. Input signal is incompatible. Use 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM input authorized dealer or the Marantz Service Center in your country. signal or analog input signal. No output to Subwoofer Out. Subwoofer = NONE has been selected Select Subwoofer = YES. SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY in SETUP mode. Be sure to perform digital connection, select digital Connect the power plug to the outlet. Noise is produced during Analog has been selected for input. SR7001 cannot be turned The power plug is not connected. DTS-encoded CD or laser input, then play. up. disc play. Cancel mute using the remote control unit. No sound and picture are Mute is on. A specifi c channel does not Nothing recorded on source. Check the encoded channel on the source side. output even when power is produce output. on. The input cable is not connected See the connection diagram and connect the cables correctly. correctly. FM or AM reception fails. Antenna connection is incomplete. Correctly connect the indoor FM and AM antennas to FM and AM antenna outlets. The master volume control is turned all Adjust the master volume. the way down. Noise is heard during AM Reception is affected by other electrical Try changing location where the AM indoor antenna reception. fi elds. is set up. The function selector position is wrong. Select correct position. Noise is heard during FM The radio waves from the broadcasting Install an FM outdoor antenna. No speaker output. The headphones are connected to the Disconnect the headphones. (Speakers will not reception. station are weak. headphone jack. output sound when headphones are connected.) Cannot get programmed Preset data has been erased. Disconnecting power plug for long periods of time Incorrect Audio or Video for Input cable connected incorrectly. Connect the cable correctly by referring to the station when the PRESET will erase preset data. If that happens, input the selected source. connection diagram. button is pressed. preset data again. Incorrect Audio from a Speaker cable connected incorrectly. Connect the cable correctly by referring to the Control with the remote Batteries are consumed. Replace all the batteries with new ones. channel. connection diagram. control unit fails. Remote controller's function-key setting Select different position from which equipment will No Audio output from the The center speaker cable connection is Connect the cable correctly. is wrong. be controlled. center channel speaker. incomplete. The distance between this SR7001 and Move closer to this SR7001. STEREO has been selected for Surround When STEREO is selected for Surround mode, no the remote commander is too far. mode. sound will be output from the center speaker. Set another Surround mode. Something is blocking SR7001 and the Remove offending object. remote commander. Center = NONE has been selected in Make the correct setting. SETUP mode. Auto Setup (SPEAKER Headphones are connected. Disconnect the headphones. SETUP) is not working. No Audio output from the The surround speaker cable connection Connect the cable correctly. surround speakers. is incomplete. Note: STEREO has been selected for Surround When STEREO has been selected for Surround mode. mode, no sound will be output from the surround • After “PROTECT” appears on the unit’s display, the standby indicator may start fl ashing. If it does, there is a speaker. Set another Surround mode. problem in the unit or the connection. If this problem reoccurs even when power is activated from the remote control unit, call for servicing. Surround = NONE has been selected in Make the correct setting. SETUP mode. No Audio output from the The surround back speaker cable Connect the cable correctly. surround back speakers. connection is incomplete. Surround mode is not EX/ES mode. Set surround mode EX/ES. Surround back = NONE has been Make the correct setting. selected in SPEAKERS SIZE SETUP

63 ENGLISH HDMI

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY The display does not The connected monitor or projector appear over an HDMI does not support HDCP. connection. The HDMI input of on the TV is Set HDMI input so that it turns on, as not on. explained in the TV's instruction manual.

The HDMI output on the source Set HDMI output so that it turns on, as component (DVD, Set Top Box, explained in the source component's etc.) is not on. instruction manual.

The HDMI mode is not correctly Set HDMI input on the FUNC INPUT set on the SR7001/SR8001. SETUP menu as explained on page 24.

The HDMI output video resolution Set the resolution so that it matches, as of the source component (DVD, explained in the instruction manuals of both Set Top Box, etc.) does not match components. the TV speciﬁ cations.

The device is connected with a A 5 m or shorter cable is recommended to non-standard HDMI cable. ensure stable operation and prevent image quality deterioration.

Power to the SR7001/SR8001 is Turn on the power to the SR7001/ off. (When the SR7001/SR8001 SR8001. is on standby, HDMI connections cannot be turned on.)

The connection between Shut off and then turn the power back on HDMI components was not to the SR7001/SR8001, TV and source authenticated. component.

Time is needed for the The connection is being There is nothing wrong with the system. display of an HDMI authenticated between the HDMI Some HDMI devices require time for connection to appear. devices. authentication.

Audio is not played The HDMI audio output of the Set the HDMI audio output so that it turns back over an HDMI source component (DVD, Set on, as explained in the source component's connection. Top Box, etc.) is not on. instruction manual.

The signal format of the source Set the HDMI audio output so that it component (DVD, Set Top Box, can connect to the SR7001/SR8001, etc.) is not supported by the as explained in the source component's SR7001/SR8001. instruction manual.

The SR7001/SR8001 is set to In the “THROUGH” mode, sound is not the HDMI audio “THROUGH” produced from the SR7001/SR8001. Set it mode. to “ENABLE”. (see page 35)

DVD-Audio is not played The DVD player does not support ¥ Use a DVD-Audio player that supports back over an HDMI CPPM, therefore it cannot output CPPM. connection. HDMI audio. ¥ Turn on PCM downsampling on the DVD player. ¥ Use an analog connection.

64 GENERAL MALFUNCTION HDMI ACCESSORIES If the equipment malfunctions, this may be because TECHNICAL Version ...... 1.2 [INPUT] Remote Control Unit RC8001SR ...... 1 an electrostatic discharge or AC line interference has ...... 1.1 [OUTPUT] Microphone ...... 1 corrupted the information in the equipment memory SPECIFICATIONS AAA-size batteries ...... 3 circuits. Therefore: GENERAL FM Antenna ...... 1 - disconnect the plug from the AC line supply FM TUNER SECTION Power Requirement ...... AC 230 V 50 Hz AM Loop Antenna ...... 1 ENGLISH Power Consumption ...... 760 W(SR7001) Front AUX Jack Cover ...... 1 - after waiting at least three minutes, reconnect Frequency Range ...... 87.5 – 108.0 MHz ...... 790 W(SR8001) AC cable ...... 1 the plug to the AC line supply Usable Sensitivity ...... IHF 1.8 µV/16.4 dBf Weight ...... 15.0 kg (SR7001) Signal to Noise Ratio ...... Mono/Stereo 75/70 dB ...... 15.0 kg (SR8001) Speciﬁ cations subject to change without prior notice. - re-attempt to operate the equipment Distortion ...... Mono/Stereo 0.2/0.3 % Stereo Separation ...... 1 kHz 45 dB Alternate Channel Selectivity ...... ± 300 kHz 60 dB Memory backup Image Rejection ...... 98 MHz 70 dB ¥ In case a power outage occurs or the power Tuner Output Level ...... 1 kHz, ± 75 kHz Dev 800 mV DIMENSIONS cord is accidentally unplugged, the SR7001 AM TUNER SECTION is equipped with a backup function to prevent memory data such as the preset memory Frequency Range ...... 531 – 1602 kHz from being erased. Signal to Noise Ratio ...... 50 dB Usable Sensitivity ...... Loop 400µV Distortion ...... 400Hz, 30 % Mod. 0.5 % 22 mm Selectivity ...... ± 20 kHz 70 dB HOW TO RESET THE UNIT AUDIO SECTION

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001 SR7001 INPUT SELECTOR VOLUME Power Output (20 Hz – 20 kHz/THD=0.08%)

PURE DIRECT DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B V-OFF PEAK ATT ANALOG SURROUND DIGITAL SLEEP AUTO SURR DIRECT DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 NIGHT EQ DIGITAL L C R

AAC PCM LFE SL S SR Front L&R ...... 8 ohms 110 W / Ch DSD DOWN UP Center ...... 8 ohms 110 W / Ch SURROUND MULTI MODE AUTO MULTI SPEAKER BAND T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

7.1CH INPUT DISPLAY Surround L&R ...... 8 ohms 110 W / Ch SPEAKERS PURE DIRECT THX MultEQ A/B

STANDBY ENTER MENU EXIT AUX 1 INPUT DIGITAL S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R POWER ON/OFF PHONES Surround Back L&R ...... 8 ohms 110 W / Ch MIC Front L&R ...... 6 ohms 140 W / Ch 396 mm

Center ...... 6 ohms 140 W / Ch 354 mm Surround L&R ...... 6 ohms 140 W / Ch Should the operation or display seem to be abnormal, Surround Back L&R ...... 6 ohms 140 W / Ch reset the unit with the following procedure. SR8001 The SR7001 is turned on, press and hold the MULTI Power Output (20 Hz – 20 kHz/THD=0.08%) + SPEAKERS A/B buttons simultaneously for 3 Front L&R ...... 8 ohms 125 W / Ch seconds or more. Center ...... 8 ohms 125 W / Ch Remember that the procedure will reset the settings Surround L&R ...... 8 ohms 125 W / Ch of the function selector, Surround mode, delay time, Surround Back L&R ...... 8 ohms 125 W / Ch TUNER PRESET etc., to their initial settings. Front L&R ...... 6 ohms 160 W / Ch Center ...... 6 ohms 160 W / Ch

Surround L&R ...... 6 ohms 160 W / Ch 20 mm Surround Back L&R ...... 6 ohms 160 W / Ch 440 mm Input Sensitivity/Impedance ...... 168 mV/ 47 Kohms Signal to Noise Ratio(Analog Input / Pure Direct) ....105 dB

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

Frequency Response INPUT SELECTOR VOLUME

PURE DIRECT DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B V-OFF PEAK ATT ANALOG SURROUND DIGITAL (Analog Input / Pure Direct) SLEEP AUTO SURR DIRECT DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 NIGHT EQ DIGITAL L C R

AAC PCM LFE SL S SR DSD ...... 8 Hz – 100 kHz (± 3 dB) DOWN UP

SURROUND MULTI MODE AUTO MULTI SPEAKER BAND T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

(Digital Input / 96 kHz PCM) 7.1CH INPUT DISPLAY SPEAKERS PURE DIRECT THX MultEQ A/B

STANDBY ENTER MENU EXIT AUX 1 INPUT DIGITAL S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R POWER ON/OFF PHONES ...... 8 Hz – 45 kHz (± 3 dB) MIC 170 mm 184 mm VIDEO Television Format ...... NTSC/PAL Input Level/Impedance ...... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms Output Level/Impedance ...... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms Video Frequency Response ...... 5 Hz to 8 MHz (– 1 dB) Video Frequency (Component) ....5 Hz to 80 MHz (– 1 dB) 14 mm S/N ...... 60 dB 65 SETUP CODES RECEIVER/TUNER CABLE SATELLITE Source button name : AMP, TUNER Source button name : AUX1 Source button name : DSS AMPLIFIER Brand name Setup code Brand name Setup code Brand name Setup code Harman/ Kardon 0137, 1331 GoldStar 0171 Canal+ 0880 Source button name : AMP Integra 0162, 1325 Hamlin 0036, 0300 Chaparral 0243 Brand name Setup code JBL 0137, 1333 Instrument 0030 Citycom 1203 Amstrad 0105 JVC 0101, 0558, 1401, 1522 Jerrold 0503, 0837, 0303, 0030 Connexions 0423 Arcam 0296 KLH 1417, 1439 LG 0171 Crossdigital 1136 Audiolab 0296 Kenwood 1340, 1054 MNet 0470 Cyrus 0227 Carver 0296 MCS 0066 Memorex 0027 D-box 0750, 1154 GE 0105 Magnavox 1216, 1296, 0558, 1116 Motorola 0503, 0837, 0303, 1133 DMT 1102 Genexxa 0422 Marantz 1216, 0066, 1116, 1316 NTL 1095 DNT 0227, 0423 Grundig 0296 Micromega 1216 Noos 0844 Daeryung 0423 Harman/Kardon 0919 Musicmagic 1116 Ono 1095 Daewoo 1323 JVC 0358 Myryad 1216 PVP Stereo 0030 Digenius 0326 Left Coast 0919 NAD 0347 Visual Matrix DirecTV 0419, 0593, 0666, 1169, 0274, 0776, 1776, 0751, Linn 0296 Norcent 1416 Pace 0264, 1087, 1095 0846, 1883, 1103, 1136 Magnavox 0296 Onkyo 0162, 0869, 1325 Panasonic 0027, 0035, 0134 Dish Network System 1032, 0802 Marantz 0919, 0296 Optimus 1050, 0558 Paragon 0027 DishPro 1032, 0802 Micromega 0296 Panasonic 1545, 0066, 1315, 1790 Philips 0332, 0344 Distratel 0111 Myryad 0296 Philips 1216, 1296, 1116, 1293, 1295, 1310, 1316 Pioneer 0904, 1904, 0171, 0560 Dream Multimedia 1264 Optimus 0422 Pioneer 1050, 0041, 0558, 1411 Pulsar 0027 Echostar 1032, 0802, 0194, 0423, 0637, 0880, 0898, 1113 Panasonic 0335 Polk Audio 1316 Quasar 0027 Engel 1044 Philips 0919, 0296 Proscan 1281 Regal 0306, 0300 Expressvu 0802 Pioneer 0040 Quasar 0066 Runco 0027 FTE 0890 Polk Audio 0919, 0296 RCA 1050, 1636, 1281, 0558, 1417 Sagem 0844 Finlux 0482 Realistic 0422 Saba 0558 Samsung 0027, 0171 Fracarro 0898 Revox 0296 Sansui 1116 Scientifi c Atlanta 0904, 1904, 0504, 0035 Fuba 0423 Sony 0247 Schneider 0558 Sony 1033 GE 0593 Soundesign 0105 Sony 1085, 0185, 1185, 1685, 1785 Starcom 0030 GOI 0802 Technics 0335 Stereophonics 1050 Supercable 0303 Galaxis 0890, 1138 Thorens 0296 Sunfi re 1340 TS 0030 General Instrument 0896 Victor 0358 Teac 1417 Tele+1 0470 Gold Box 0880 Wards 0105, 0040 Technics 1335, 1545, 0066, 1336 Telewest 1095 Grundig 0200, 0874 Yamaha 0381 Telefunken 0558 Torx 0030 HTS 0802 Thomson 1281 Toshiba 0027 Hirschmann 0200, 0423 Thorens 1216 Trans PX 0303 Hitachi 0846, 0482 RECEIVER/TUNER Uher 0558 United Cable 0030 Hughes 1169, 0776, 1776 Source button name : AMP, TUNER Venturer 1417 Zenith 0027, 0552, 0926 Network Systems Victor 0101 Humax 0890, 1203 Brand name Setup code Wards 0185, 0041 InVideo 0898 ADC 0558 Yamaha 0203, 1203, 1358 SATELLITE JVC 0802 Aiwa 1432, 0185, 1116, 1415, 1668 Kathrein 0150, 0200, 0227, 0276, 0685, 1248 Alco 1417 Source button name : DSS Kreiselmeyer 0200 Anam 1636 Brand name Setup code CABLE Labgear 1323 Apex Digital 1284 @sat 1327 Logix 1044 Audiolab 1216 Source button name : AUX1 ABsat 0150 Lorenzen 0326 Audiotronic 1216 Brand name Setup code Alba 0482 Magnavox 0751, 0749 Audiovox 1417 ABC 0030, 0035 AlphaStar 0799 Manhattan 0482, 1044, 1110 Bose 1256 Americast 0926 Amstrad 0874 Marantz 0227 Cambridge 1397 Bell South 0926 Aston 0169, 1156 MediaSat 0880 Soundworks Birmingham Cable 0303 Astro 0200 Memorex 0751 Capetronic 0558 Communications Atsat 1327 Metronic 0111 Carver 1216, 1116 British Telecom 0030 Avalon 0423 Mitsubishi 0776 Centrex 1284 Cable & Wireless 1095 Blaupunkt 0200 Motorola 0896 Denon 1387 Daeryung 0904, 1904, 0504, 0035 British Sky 0874, 1202 Myryad 0227 Ferguson 0558 Director 0503 Broadcasting Next Level 0896 Fine Arts 1216 Filmnet 0470 Canal Digital 0880 Grundig 1216 General 0503, 0837, 0303, Canal Satellite 0880 i SATELLITE TAPE DECK CD/CD-R PLAYER TV Source button name : DSS Source button name : TAPE Source button name : CD, CDR, MD Source button name : TV Brand name Setup code Brand name Setup code Brand name Setup code Brand name Setup code Nokia 0482, 0750, 0778, 1154, 1250, 1750 Aiwa 0056 Genexxa 0059, 0332 MARANTZ 0001 OctalTV 1032 Carver 0056 Goodmans 0332 TV1 (TV, VDP) Orbitech 1127 Grundig 0056 Grundig 0184 MARANTZ 0002 Pace 0482, 0874, 1202, 1350 Harman/Kardon 0056 Harman/ Kardon 0184, 0200 TV2 (Plasma) Panasonic 0274, 0728, 0874, 1347 Magnavox 0056 Hitachi 0059 AGB 0543 Panda 0482 Marantz 0056 JVC 0099 AOC 0478, 0120, 0207, 0087, 0057, 0205, 0036, 0119, Paysat 0751 Myryad 0056 Kenwood 0708, 0653, 0055, 0064 0135 Philips 1169, 0776, 1776, 0751, 1103, 0749, 0160, 0227, Optimus 0054 Krell 0184 ASA 0131 0482, 0880 Philips 0056 LXI 0332 AWA 0036 Pioneer 0880 Pioneer 0054 Linn 0184 Acura 0036 Promax 0482 Polk Audio 0056 MCS 0056 Addison 0119, 0135, 0680 Proscan 0419, 0593 RCA 0054 Magnavox 0184, 0332 Admiral 0120, 0490, 0190 RCA 0419, 0593, 0882, 0170 Revox 0056 Marantz 0653, 0056, 0184 Advent 0788 RFT 0227 Sansui 0056 Matsui 0184 Aiko 0119 RadioShack 0896 Sony 0270 Memorex 0332 Akai 0839, 0729, 0057, 0036, 0235, 0388, 0543 Radiola 0227 Thorens 0056 Meridian 0184 Akura 0291 Radix 0423 Wards 0054 Micromega 0184 Alba 0036, 0064, 0398, 0695 SKY 0883, 0874, 1202 Miro 0027 America Action 0207 SM Electronic 1227 Mission 0184 Ampro 0778 Sabre 0482 LASER DISK Myryad 0184 Amstrad 0198, 0036, 0064, 0398, 0439, 0460, 0543 Sagem 0847, 1141, 1280 NAD 0027 Anam 0277, 0207, 0036 Source button name : AUX2 Samsung 1303, 1136, 1044, 1319 NSM 0184 Anam National 0277, 0677 Brand name Setup code Sat Control 1327 Naim 0184 Anitech 0036 Carver 0091 Satstation 1110 Onkyo 0895 Apex Digital 0775, 0792, 0794 Denon 0086 Schwaiger 1138 Optimus 0027, 0059, 0064, 0206, 0332 Audiosonic 0064, 0136 Marantz 0091 Seemann 0423 Panasonic 0056 Audiovox 0478, 0207, 0119, 0650 Mitsubishi 0086 Siemens 0200 Philips 0653, 0184 Bang & Olufsen 0592 NAD 0086 Sony 0666, 1666, 0874 Pioneer 0059, 0332 Basic Line 0036 Nagsmi 0086 Star Choice 0896 Polk Audio 0184 Baur 0064, 0388, 0539 Optimus 0086 Strong 1327 Proton 0184 Baysonic 0207 Philips 0091 TPS 0847, 1280 QED 0184 Beaumark 0205 Pioneer 0086 Tantec 0482 Quad 0184 Beko 0397, 0513, 0741, 0742 Salora 0091 TechniSat 1126, 1127 Quasar 0056 Bell & Howell 0181 Sony 0228 Telestar 1127 RCA 0059, 0206, 0332 Beon 0064 Telefunken 0086 Thomson 0482, 0880, 1073, 1318 Realistic 0206 Blaupunkt 0222 Topfi eld 1233 Revox 0184 Blue Sky 0695, 1064 Toshiba 0776, 1776, 0817 CD/CD-R PLAYER Rotel 0184 Bondstec 0274 UltimateTV 0419, 0666 SAE 0184 Bradford 0207 Uniden 0751, 0749 Source button name : CD, CDR, MD Sansui 0184, 0332 Brandt 0136, 0362 Universum 0200 Brand name Setup code Sanyo 0206 Broksonic 0263, 0490 Ventana 0227 Aiwa 0184 Scott 0332 Bush 0036, 0064, 0398, 0401, 0695, 1064 Wisi 0200, 0423, 0482 Arcam 0184 Sears 0332 CCE 0064 XSat 0150 Audio Research 0184 Sharp 0888, 0064 CGE 0274 Zehnder 1102 AudioTon 0184 Simaudio 0184 CTC 0274 Zenith 0883, 1883 Audiolab 0184 Sonic Frontiers 0184 CXC 0207 Audiomeca 0184 Sony 0517, 0027 Candle 0057 Cairn 0184 Symphonic 0332 Carnivale 0057 California Audio Labs 0056 TAG McLaren 0184 Carver 0081, 0197 Carver 0184, 0206 Tandy 0059 Cascade 0036 Cyrus 0184 Technics 0056 Cathay 0064 DKK 0027 Thorens 0184 Celebrity 0027 DMX Electronics 0184 Thule 0184 Celera 0792 Denon 0900 Universum 0184 Centurion 0064 Dynamic Bass 0206 Victor 0099 Changhong 0792 Emerson 0332 Wards 0184 Ching Tai 0036, 0119 Fisher 0206 ii TV TV TV TV Source button name : TV Source button name : TV Source button name : TV Source button name : TV Brand name Setup code Brand name Setup code Brand name Setup code Brand name Setup code Chun Yun 0027, 0207, 0036, 0119 GE 0074, 0078, 0478, 0207, 0057, 0205, 1481, 0119, Kathrein 0583 Onwa 0207, 0460 Chung Hsin 0207, 0080, 0135 0587, 1174, 1374 Kendo 0064 Optimus 0181, 0277, 0193, 0677 Cimline 0036 GEC 0064, 0543 Kenwood 0057 Optonica 0120 Cineral 0478, 0119 Gateway 1782, 1783 Kneissel 0286, 0462 Orion 0263, 0490, 0064, 0347, 0543 Citizen 0087, 0057, 0119 Geloso 0036 Kolin 0207, 0080, 0135 Osaki 0291, 0439 Clarion 0207 Genexxa 0190 Korpel 0064 Otto Versand 0064, 0347, 0539, 0583 Clarivox 0064 Gibralter 0044, 0057 Koyoda 0036 Palladium 0397, 0445 Clatronic 0274, 0397 GoldStar 0181, 0057, 0205, 0064, 0136, 0404 L&S Electronic 0835 Panama 0291 Condor 0347, 0397 Goodmans 0064, 0398, 0401, 0661 LG 0087, 0057, 0205, 0064, 0135, 0741 Panasonic 0081, 0277, 0078, 0064, 0190, 0677, 1437 Conrac 0835 Gorenje 0397 LXI 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205 Pathe Cinema 0265, 0347 Contec 0207, 0036 Gradiente 0080, 0197 Leyco 0064, 0291 Pausa 0036 Craig 0207 Graetz 0190, 0388 Liesenk & Tter 0064 Penney 0074, 0183, 0078, 0087, 0057, 0205, 1374 Crosley 0081 Granada 0064, 0235, 0366, 0543 Loewe 0539 Perdio 0347 Crown 0207, 0036, 0064, 0397, 0445 Grandin 0637 Luxor 0383, 0388 Philco 0081, 0490, 0207, 0057, 0205, 0172, 1688, 0064, Curtis Mathes 0074, 0081, 0181, 0478, 0120, 0087, 0729, 0057, Grundig 0064, 0222, 0514, 0583, 0614 M Electronic 0036, 0064, 0131, 0132, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0373, 0274 0172, 0193, 1174, 1374 Grunpy 0207 0401, 0507 Philips 0081, 0027, 0078, 0057, 0205, 1481, 0064, 0119, Daewoo 0181, 0478, 0207, 0057, 0205, 1688, 0036, 0064, HCM 0036, 0439 MGA 0177, 0057, 0205 0135, 0401, 0583, 0717 0119, 0135, 0197, 0401, 0650, 0661 Hallmark 0205 MTC 0087, 0057, 0539 Phonola 0064 Dansai 0064 Hankook 0207, 0057, 0205 Magnadyne 0274, 0543 Pilot 0057 Dayton 0036 Hanseatic 0064, 0347, 0388, 0455, 0583 Magnafon 0543 Pioneer 0193, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0706, 0787, 0893 De Graaf 0235, 0575 Hantarex 0543 Magnavox 0081, 0057, 1481, 1281 Portland 0119 Decca 0064, 0543 Harman/Kardon 0081 Manesth 0291, 0347 Prandoni-Prince 0543 Denon 0172 Harvard 0207 Mark 0064 Prima 0788 Digatron 0064 Havermy 0120 Matsui 0036, 0064, 0235, 0398, 0514, 0543 Prism 0078 Dixi 0036, 0064 Hello Kitty 0478 Matsushita 0277, 0677 Profex 0036, 0388 Dumont 0044 Hinari 0036, 0064 Mediator 0064 Proscan 0074 Dwin 0747, 0801 Hisawa 0482 Medion 0695, 0835, 1064 Protech 0036, 0064, 0274, 0291, 0445, 0695 ECE 0064 Hitachi 0057, 0205, 1172, 0172, 1283, 0036, 0119, Megatron 0205, 0172 Proton 0057, 0205, 0036 Elbe 0286 0132,0136, 0190, 0252, 0383, 0508, 0575, 0605 Memorex 0181, 0277, 0490, 0177, 0205, 0036, 1064 Pulsar 0044 Electroband 0027 Hua Tun 0036 Metz 0474 Quasar 0277, 0078, 0677 Elin 0064, 0575 Huanyu 0401 Micromaxx 0835 Quelle 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 Elite 0347 Hypson 0064, 0291 Microstar 0835 R-Line 0064 Elta 0036 ICE 0291, 0398 Midland 0074, 0044, 0078 RCA 0074, 0027, 0057, 0205, 1474, 1481, 0117, 0119, Emerson 0181, 0263, 0490, 0207, 0205, 0388, 0650 ITS 0398 Minerva 0514 0706, 1074, 1174, 1274, 1374, 1574 Envision 0057, 0840 ITT 0190, 0388, 0575 Minoka 0439 RFT 0455 Epson 0860 Imperial 0274, 0397, 0445 Mitsubishi 0181, 0277, 0120, 0263, 0207, 0177, 1277, 0057, RadioShack 0074, 0181, 0207, 0057, 0205 Erres 0064 Indiana 0064 0205, 0135, 0539, 0863 Radiola 0064 Ether 0057, 0036 Infi nity 0081 Mivar 0318, 0319, 0543, 0636 Radiomarelli 0543 Etron 0036 Ingelen 0190 Motorola 0120 Realistic 0181, 0207, 0057, 0205 Europhon 0543 Inno Hit 0543 Multitech 0207, 0036 Rediffusion 0388 Ferguson 0064, 0100, 0136, 0265, 0314, 0362, 0587 Innova 0064 Myryad 0583 Reoc 0741 Fidelity 0388 Inteq 0044 NAD 0183, 0205, 0388, 0893 Revox 0064 Finlandia 0235, 0373 Interfunk 0064, 0190, 0274, 0388, 0539 NEC 0181, 0183, 0078, 0057, 0205, 0036, 0197, 0482, Rex 0190, 0286, 0291 Finlux 0064, 0131, 0132, 0373, 0543 Intervision 0064, 0291, 0404 0524, 1731 Roadstar 0036, 0291, 0445 Firstar 0263, 0036 JBL 0081 NEI 0064 Runco 0044, 0057, 0524, 0630 Firstline 0036, 0274, 0695 JCB 0027 NTC 0119 SBR 0064 Fisher 0181, 0131, 0235, 0397 JVC 0490, 0080, 0398, 0680, 0710 Neckermann 0064, 0583 SEG 0291, 0695 Flint 0482 Jean 0183, 0078, 0263, 0036, 0119 Netsat 0064 SEI 0543 Formenti 0064, 0347 Jensen 0788 Newave 0120, 0205, 0036, 0119 SKY 0064 Fortress 0120 KEC 0207 Nikkai 0064, 0291 SSS 0207 Frontech 0190, 0274, 0291 KTV 0207, 0057 Nikko 0057, 0205, 0119 Saba 0136, 0190, 0314, 0362 Fujitsu 0710, 0836 Kaisui 0036 Nokia 0388, 0500, 0507, 0575, 0658 Saccs 0265 Funai 0207, 0198, 0291 Kapsch 0190 Norcent 0775, 0851 Sagem 0637 Futuretech 0207 Karcher 0637 Nordmende 0136, 0314, 0587 Saisho 0036, 0291, 0543 Oceanic 0190, 0388 Salora 0190, 0383, 0388, 0575 iii TV TV VCR VCR Source button name : TV Source button name : TV Source button name : VCR Source button name : VCR Brand name Setup code Brand name Setup code Brand name Setup code Brand name Setup code Sambers 0543 Teac 0036, 0064, 0291, 0439, 0445, 0482, 0695, 1064 Anam 0064, 0267, 0305, 0253, 0507 GEC 0108 Sampo 0181, 0120, 0057, 0205, 0198, 0036, 0119, 0677, Tec 0274 Anam National 0253, 1589 Garrard 0027 1782 Technema 0347 Anitech 0099 General 0072 Samsung 0181, 0087, 0839, 0729, 0057, 0205, 0036, 0064, Technics 0277, 0078, 0677 Asha 0267 Go Video 0459 0117, 0119, 0291, 0397, 0583, 0614, 0645, 0793, Techwood 0078 Asuka 0064 GoldHand 0099 0841 Teco 0078, 0120, 0205, 0036, 0119, 0291, 0680 Audiovox 0064, 0305 GoldStar 0064, 0252, 0507, 1264 Sansei 0478 Teknika 0081, 0207, 0177, 0087, 0119 Baird 0027, 0131, 0068 Goodmans 0064, 0027, 0099, 0305 Sansui 0490 Telefunken 0729, 0136, 0289, 0362, 0652 Basic Line 0099, 0305 Gradiente 0027 Sanyo 0181, 0207, 0131, 0235, 0366, 0826 Telemeister 0347 Beaumark 0267 Graetz 0267, 0131, 0068 Schaub Lorenz 0388 Teletech 0036 Bell & Howell 0131 Granada 0108, 0131 Schneider 0064, 0274, 0398, 0695 Tensai 0347 Blaupunkt 0253 Grandin 0064, 0027, 0099 Scotch 0205 Tera 0057 Brandt 0347 Grundig 0108, 0099, 0253, 0374 Scott 0263, 0207, 0205 Thomson 1474, 0136, 0314, 0587, 0652 Brandt Electronic 0068 HCM 0099 Sears 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205, 0198 Thorn 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 Broksonic 0211, 0375, 1506 HI-Q 0074 Seleco 0190, 0286 Toshiba 0181, 0183, 0087, 1283, 0535, 0645, 0677, 0859, Bush 0099, 0305, 0379 Hanseatic 0064 Semivox 0207 1383, 1683, 1731 CCE 0099, 0305 Harley Davidson 0027 Semp 0183 Triumph 0543 CGE 0027 Harman/Kardon 0108 Sharp 0120, 0057, 0677 Tuntex 0057, 0036, 0119 Calix 0064 Harwood 0099 Shen Ying 0036, 0119 Uher 0347 Canon 0062 Hinari 0267, 0099, 0379 Sheng Chia 0120, 0263, 0036 Universum 0064, 0131, 0132, 0291, 0373, 0397, 0519 Carver 0108 Hitachi 0064, 0267, 0027, 0069, 0068 Siarem 0543 Vector Research 0057 Cimline 0099 Hughes 0069 Siemens 0064, 0222 Vestel 0064 Cineral 0305 Network Systems Sinudyne 0543 Victor 0277, 0080, 0677, 0680 Citizen 0064, 0305, 1305 Hypson 0099 Skantic 0383 Videosat 0274 Colt 0099 ITT 0267, 0131, 0068 Skygiant 0207 Vidikron 0081 Combitech 0379 ITV 0064, 0305 Skyworth 0064 Vidtech 0205 Craig 0064, 0074, 0267, 0099 Imperial 0027 Solavox 0190 ViewSonic 1782 Crown 0099, 0305 Interfunk 0108 Sonitron 0235 Vision 0347 Curtis Mathes 0087, 0062, 0068, 1062 JVC 0072, 0094, 0068 Sonoko 0036, 0064 Voxson 0190 Cybernex 0267 Jensen 0068 Sonolor 0190, 0235 Waltham 0383 Cyrus 0108 KEC 0064, 0305 Sontec 0064 Wards 0081, 0057, 0205, 0893 Daewoo 0072, 0131, 0305, 0669, 1305 KLH 0099 Sony 1127, 0027, 0677, 0861, 1532, 1678 Watson 0064, 0347 Dansai 0099 Kaisui 0099 Soundesign 0207, 0205 Waycon 0183 De Graaf 0069 Kenwood 0094, 0068 Soundwave 0064, 0445 White Westinghouse 0490, 0064, 0347,0650 Decca 0108, 0027 Kodak 0062, 0064 Sowa 0183, 0078, 0087, 0205, 0119 Yamaha 0057, 0796, 0860 Denon 0069 Kolin 0070, 0068 Squareview 0198 Yapshe 0277 Dual 0068 Korpel 0099 Standard 0036 Yoko 0064, 0291 Dumont 0108, 0027, 0131 LG 0064, 0072, 0069, 0507 Starlite 0207 Zenith 0044, 0490, 0205, 0119 Dynatech 0027 LXI 0064 Stern 0190, 0286 ESC 0267, 0305 Lenco 0305 Supreme 0027 Elcatech 0099 Leyco 0099 Sylvania 0081, 0057, 0198 VCR Electrohome 0064 Lloyd’s 0027 Symphonic 0207, 0198 Electrophonic 0064 Loewe 0064, 0108, 1589 Source button name : VCR Synco 0027, 0478, 0120, 0087, 0205, 0119 Emerex 0059 Logik 0267, 0099 Brand name Setup code Sysline 0064 Emerson 0062, 0064, 0211, 0267, 0072, 0027, 0070, 0305, Luxor 0075, 0131, 0070 ASA 0064, 0108 T + A 0474 1305, 1506 M Electronic 0027 Admiral 0075 TCM 0835 Ferguson 0068, 0347 MEI 0062 Adventura 0027 TMK 0205 Fidelity 0027 MGA 0267, 0070 Aiko 0305 TNCi 0044 Finlandia 0108, 0131 MGN Technology 0267 Aiwa 0064, 0027, 0334, 0375, 0379 TVS 0490 Finlux 0108, 0027, 0069, 0131 MTC 0267, 0027 Akai 0068, 0342 Tacico 0205, 0036, 0119 Firstline 0064, 0072, 0070, 0099 Magnasonic 1305 Akiba 0099 Tai Yi 0036 Fisher 0074, 0131 Magnavox 0062, 0066, 0108, 0027, 1808 Alba 0099, 0305, 0342, 0379 Tandy 0120, 0190 Fuji 0062, 0060 Magnin 0267 America Action 0305 Tashiko 0119, 0677 Fujitsu 0072, 0027 Manesth 0072, 0099 American High 0062 Tatung 0081, 0181, 0183, 0078, 0087, 0036, 0064, 0543 Funai 0027 Marantz 0062, 0108 Amstrad 0027 GE 0087, 0062, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 Marta 0064 iv VCR VCR VCR DVD Source button name : VCR Source button name : VCR Source button name : VCR Source button name : DVD Brand name Setup code Brand name Setup code Brand name Setup code Brand name Setup code Matsui 0375, 0379 Realistic 0062, 0064, 0075, 0074, 0027, 0131 Thomson 0087, 0094, 0068, 0347 JVC 0585, 0650 Matsushita 0062 Reoc 0375 Thorn 0131, 0068 KLH 0744 Medion 0375 ReplayTV 0641, 0643 Tivo 0645, 0663 Kenwood 0517, 0561 Memorex 0062, 0064, 0075, 0066, 0074, 0267, 0027, 0131, Rex 0068 Toshiba 0108, 0072, 0094, 0070, 0068, 0872 Koss 0678 0334, 0375, 1264 Roadstar 0064, 0267, 0099, 0305 Totevision 0064, 0267 LG 0768 Memphis 0099 Runco 0066 Uher 0267 Limit 0795 Metz 0064, 0374, 1589 SBR 0108 Unitech 0267 Magnavox 0530, 0702 Minolta 0069 SEG 0267 Universum 0064, 0108, 0267, 0027 Memorex 0858 Mitsubishi 0108, 0094, 0070, 0068, 0834 SEI 0108 Vector 0072 MiCO 0750 Motorola 0062, 0075 STS 0069 Victor 0094, 0068 Microsoft 0549 Multitech 0027, 0099 Saba 0068, 0347 Video Concepts 0072 Mintek 0744 Murphy 0027 Salora 0070 Videomagic 0064 Mitsubishi 0548 Myryad 0108 Sampo 0064, 0075 Videosonic 0267 Mustek 0757 NAD 0131 Samsung 0267, 0072, 0459 Villain 0027 Nesa 0744 NEC 0062, 0064, 0075, 0131, 0094, 0068 Sanky 0075, 0066 Wards 0087, 0062, 0075, 0074, 0108, 0267, 0027, 0069, Onkyo 0530 National 0253 Sansui 0027, 0094, 0068, 1506 0099 Oritron 0678 Neckermann 0108 Sanyo 0074, 0267, 0131 White Westinghouse 0099 Palsonic 0699 Nesco 0099 Saville 0379 XR-1000 0062, 0027, 0099 Panasonic 0517, 0659, 1389 Newave 0064 Schaub Lorenz 0027, 0131, 0068 Yamaha 0068 Philips 0530, 0566, 0673, 0881 Nikko 0064 Schneider 0108, 0027, 0099 Yamishi 0099 Pioneer 0552, 0598, 0658, 0659 Noblex 0267 Scott 0211, 0072, 0070 Yokan 0099 Polk Audio 0566 Nokia 0267, 0131, 0068 Sears 0062, 0064, 0074, 0027, 0069, 0131, 1264 Yoko 0267 Proscan 0549 Nordmende 0068, 0347 Seleco 0068 Zenith 0066, 0060, 0027, 1506 Qwestar 0678 Oceanic 0027, 0068 Semp 0072 RCA 0549, 0598, 0744 Okano 0342, 0375 Sharp 0075, 0834 Rotel 0650 Olympus 0062, 0253 Shintom 0131, 0099 DVD SM Electronic 0757 Optimus 0064, 0075, 0131, 0459 Shogun 0267 Samsung 0600 Source button name : DVD Orion 0211, 0375, 0379, 1506 Siemens 0064, 0108, 0131 Sanyo 0697 Brand name Setup code Osaki 0064, 0027, 0099 Silva 0064 Sharp 0657 MARANTZ DVD1 0001 Otto Versand 0108 Singer 0072, 0099 Sherwood 0797 MARANTZ DVD2 0002 Palladium 0064, 0068, 0099 Sinudyne 0108 Shinsonic 0560 Acoustic Solutions 0757 Panasonic 0062, 0252, 0253, 0643, 1062, 1589 Sonic Blue 0641, 0643 Slim Art 0811 Alba 0744 Pathe Marconi 0068 Sontec 0064 Sony 0560, 0891 Amstrad 0740 Penney 0062, 0064, 0267, 0069, 1062, 1264 Sony 0062, 0059, 0060, 0027, 0663, 1259 Sylvania 0702 Apex Digital 0699, 0744, 0782, 0821, 0823, 0857, 1127 Pentax 0069 Sunkai 0375 Tatung 0797 Blaupunkt 0744 Perdio 0027 Sunstar 0027 Teac 0598, 0744 Blue Parade 0598 Philco 0062 Suntronic 0027 Technics 0517 Bush 0740 Philips 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208 Sylvania 0062, 0108, 0027, 0070, 1808 Theta Digital 0598 Centrex 0699 Phonola 0108 Symphonic 0027 Thomson 0549 Clatronic 0815 Pilot 0064 TMK 0267 Toshiba 0530 CyberHome 0741 Pioneer 0108, 0069, 0094 Tandy 0027, 0131 Urban Concepts 0530 DVD2000 0548 Polk Audio 0108 Tashiko 0064, 0027 XBox 0549 Daewoo 0811, 0797 Profi tronic 0267 Diamond 0795 Yamaha 0517, 0566, 0572 Dansai 0797 Proline 0027 Digitrex 0699 Zenith 0530, 0618, 0768 Decca 0797 Proscan 0087, 1087 Emerson 0618 Zeus 0811 Denon 0517 Protec 0099 Tatung 0108, 0072, 0027, 0094, 0068 Enterprise 0618 Pulsar 0066 Teac 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669 Fisher 0697 Pye 0108 Technics 0062, 0253 GE 0549, 0744 Quasar 0062, 1062 Teco 0062, 0064, 0075, 0068 Go Video 0742 Quelle 0108 Teknika 0062, 0064, 0027 GoldStar 0768 RCA 0087, 0062, 0267, 0069, 0834, 1062, 1087 Teleavia 0068 Gradiente 0678 RadioShack 0027 Telefunken 0068, 0347 Greenhill 0744 Radiola 0108 Tenosal 0099 Grundig 0566 Radix 0064 Tensai 0027 Hitachi 0600, 0691 Randex 0064 Thomas 0027 Hiteker 0699 v Source button name : DVD Source button name : VCR Source button name : MD DIRECT BUTTON PAGE Command Note PAGE Command Note PAGE Command Note PAGE 1 1 MENU SELECTS MAIN MENU PAGE 1 1 TV/VCR SELECT TV/VCR PAGE 1 1 REPEAT SELECTS REPEAT MODE FUNCTIONS 2 AUDIO SELECT LANGUAGES 2 2XPLAY TWICE NORMAL PLAYBACK 2 SHUFLE SELECTS SHUFFLE PLAY 3 SUB-T SELECT SUB TITLE SPEED 3 DISP SELECTS DISPLAY MODE Source button name : AMP 4 10+ DIGIT ENTRY +10 3 SLOW SLOW PLAYBACK SPEED 4 EDIT SELECT EDIT MODE PAGE Command Note 5 TRAY TRAY OPEN/CLOSE 4 STILL STILL FRAME 5 EJECT EJECT PAGE 1 1 AUTO SELECT AUTO SURROUND PAGE 2 1 SETUP SELECTS SETUP MENU 5 EJECT EJECT PAGE 2 1 SP/LP SELECTS SP/LP MODE 2 2 SELECT DOLBY MODE 2 ANGLE SELECTS ANGLE PAGE 2 1 OTR ONE TOUCH RECORDING 2 DELETE SELECTS DELETE 3 DTS SELECT DTS MODE 3 OSD ACTIVATES ON SCREEN DISPLAY 2 AUDIO SELECT AUDIO MODE 3 ENTER SELECTS ENTER 4 EX/ES SELECT EX/ES 4 FF FAST FORWARD 3 SKIP SKIP TO NEXT PROG.MARKER 4 FF FAST FORWARD 5 DIRECT SELECT PURE DIRECT 5 REW REWIND 4 FF FAST FORWARD 5 REW REWIND PAGE 2 1 MCH-ST SELECT MULTI CHANNEL PAGE 3 1 SLOW SLOW FORWARD 5 REW REWIND PAGE 3 1 MARKER SELECTS AUTO MARKER STEREO 2 L-PLAY LAST PLAY PAGE 3 1 VIS + VHS INDEX SERCH NEXT 2 PROG SELECTS PROGRAM MODE 2 STEREO SELECT STEREO MODE 3 SHUFLE SHUFFLE PLAY 2 VIS- VHS INDEX SERCH PREVIOUS 3 SYNC-R SYNCRO REC 3 VIRTUA SELECT VIRTUAL MODE 4 REPEAT REPEAT MODE 3 4 CHAR SELECTS CHARACTER MODE 4 CS-II SELECT CS-II MODE 5 A/B REPEAT A TO B 4 5 5 HT-EQ – PAGE 4 1 RETURN RETURN TO MENU 5 PAGE 3 1 NIGHT NIGHT MODE ON/OFF 2 T/C TITLE AND CHAPTER Source button name : AUX 2 2 BASS + BASS + 3 3-D SURROUND ON/OFF Source button name : CDR PAGE Command Note 3 BASS - BASS - 4 TITLE SELECTS TITLE MENU PAGE Command Note PAGE 1 1 SHUFFL SELECT AUX1 4 TREB + TREBLE + 5 ZOOM ZOOM MODE ON/OFF PAGE 1 1 INPUT SELECT INPUT SOURCE 2 REPEAT SELECT AUX2 5TREB - TREBLE - 2 INCR INCREMENTS TRACK No. 3 MODE SELECT AUX3 PAGE 4 1 MULTI MULTI ROOM ON/OFF Source button name : CD 3 SYNC-R ACTIVATE SYNCRO 4 SORT SELECT NET 2 M-SPKR MULTI SPEAKER ON/OFF PAGE Command Note RECORDING 5 MUTE 3 A/D SELECT ANALOG/DIGITAL PAGE 1 1 DISC + CD CHANGER NEXT DISC 4 PROG ACTIVATE PROGRAM MODE PAGE 2 1 INPUT+ INPUT SELECTOR FORWARD 4 V-OFF VIDEO OFF 2 DISC - CD CHANGER PREVIOUS DISC 5 TRAY TRAY OPEN/CLOSE 2 INPUT- INPUT SELECTOR REVERSE 5 AUDIO – 3 SHUFLE SHUFFLE PLAY PAGE 2 1 SCROLL SCROLL/RECALL 3 4 REPEAT REPEAT 2 FINAL FINALIZES(WRITES TOC) 4 Source button name : TUNER 5 TRAY TRAY OPEN/CLOSE 3 BLANK RECORDS BLANK 5 PAGE Command Note PAGE 2 1 TEXT ACTIVATE TEXT FUNCTION 4 FF FAST FORWARD PAGE 1 1 FM SELECT FM 2 AMS AUTO MUSIC SCAN 5 REW REWIND Source button name : AUX 1 2 AM SELECT AM 3 SCROLL SCROLL/RECALL PAGE 3 1 BLANK RECORDS BLANK PAGE Command Note 3 XM/DAB SELECT XM RADIO 4 FF FAST FORWARD 2 REPEAT ACTIVATE REPEAT MODE PAGE 1 1 SHUFFL SELECT SHUFFLE PLAY 4 T-MODE SELECT MONO/STEREO 5 REW REWIND 3 2 REPEAT SELECT REPEAT PLAY 5 BAND SELECT RADIO BAND PAGE 3 1 DISC 1 CD CHANGER DISC 1 4 3 MODE CHANGE USER INTERFACE MODE PAGE 2 1 SCAN + FREQUENCY SCAN UP 2 DISC 2 CD CHANGER DISC 2 5 4 SORT SORT DATA BASE 2 SCAN - FREQUENCY SCAN DOWN 3 DISC 3 CD CHANGER DISC 3 5 MUTE MUTE ON/OFF (TOGGLE) 3 T-MODE SELECT MONO/STEREO 4 DISC 4 CD CHANGER DISC 4 PAGE 2 1 ALBUM+ NEXT ALBUM 4 P-SCAN SELECT PRESET SCAN 5 DISC 5 CD CHANGER DISC 5 Source button name : TAPE 2 ALBUM- PREVIOUS ALBUM 5 P-INFO SHOW PRESET INFORMATION PAGE 4 1 UNIT SELECT UNIT No. PAGE Command Note 3 LIST+ NEXT PLAY LIST PAGE 3 1 DISP DISPLAY 2 TITL-S SELECT TITLE SEARCH PAGE 1 1 TAPE-A SELECT TAPE DECK A 4 LIST- PREVIOUS PLAY LIST European 2 PTY RDS PTY 3 TRACK SELECT TRACK No. 2 TAPE-B SELECT TAPE DECK B 5 model only 3 AF RDS ALTERNATE FREQEMCY 4 CATGRY SELECT CATEGORY 3 DIR AUTO REVERSE DIRECTION PAGE 3 1 ARTIST SORT ORDER (ARTIST) 4 STM RDS STATION MODE 5 P-MODE SELECT PLAY MODE 4 TIME TIME DISPLAY 2 ALBUM SORT ORDER (ALBUM) 5 DWR RDS DSR WAVE LANGUAGE 5 TRAY TRAY OPEN/CLOSE 3 SONG SORT ORDER (SONG) PAGE 4 1 SCAN + FREQUENCY SCAN UP PAGE 2 1 AMS AUTO MUSIC SCAN 4 GENRE SORT ORDER (GENRE) 2 SCAN - FREQUENCY SCAN DOWN 2 5 P-LIST SORT ORDER (PLAY LIST) 3 DISP XM/RDS DISPLAY 3 PAGE 4 1 1 INPUT+ INPUT SELECTOR FORWARD 4 CAT + CATEGORY SEARCH UP 4 FF FAST FORWARD 2 INPUT- INPUT SELECTOR REVERSE 5 CAT - CATEGORY SEARCH DOWN 5 REW REWIND 3 4 5 vi www.marantz.com You can find your nearest authorized distributor or dealer on our website.

is a registered trademark.

Printed in China 07/2006 00M05CW851310 ecmf-d